678343
6
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/256
Next page
OWNER´S MANUAL
Vehicle and Infotainment
ŠKODA RAPID
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Date of vehicle delivery
a)
ŠKODA Partner
Stamp and signature of the vendor
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the specified vehicle in good condi-
tion, have received information on how to operate it correctly, and have
had the terms of the warranty explained to me.
Signature of the customer
Has the vehicle an extended warranty? Yes
No
Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warranty
b)
Years: or km/mile-
age:
or
miles:
a)
Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific regulations,
the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the vehicle
handover.
b)
Depending on which comes first.

5JA012720AM
1st vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
(filled in by the vendor)
belongs to:
Title, Name/Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:
2nd vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
belongs to:
Title, Name/Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:

5JA012720AM
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for
new cars 6
Radio equipment - Information on Directive
2014/53/EU 8
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information 9
General 9
Printed Owner's Manual 9
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual 9
Tutorial videos 10
Application MyŠKODA App
10
Notes
11
Online Services
ŠKODA Connect
12
Service packageŠKODA Connect 12
ŠKODA Connect website
12
User and vehicle registration, activation of
online services
12
Managing online services
14
Emergency call 15
Care Connect Services 15
Infotainment Online services
16
Safety
Passive Safety 18
General information 18
Correct and safe seating position 18
Seat belts
21
Using seat belts 21
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
23
Airbag system 24
Description of the airbag system 24
Airbag deactivation 26
Transporting children safely 28
Child seat 28
Fastening systems 31
Operation
Cockpit 35
Overview 34
Instruments and warning lights 36
Instrument cluster 36
Warning lights
37
Information system
46
Driver information system
46
Operation of the information system 47
Driving data (Multifunction display)
48
MAXI DOT display
50
Service intervals
51
Unlocking and opening
52
Unlocking and locking 52
Anti-theft alarm system
56
Boot lid
57
Window operation 58
Lights and visibility
60
Light 60
Interior lighting 64
Visibility
65
Windscreen wipers and washers 66
Rear view mirror
68
Seats and head restraints 69
Front seats 69
Rear seats
70
Headrests 71
Seat heaters 72
Useful features 73
Passenger compartment features 73
Electrical sockets 78
Ashtray and cigarette lighter 79
Tablet holder
80
Transport of cargo 81
Luggage compartment and transporting
objects 81
Transportation on the roof rack 85
Heating and ventilation
86
Heating, manual air conditioning system,
Climatronic 86
Infotainment
Introductory information
90
Important information
90
Infotainment overview
90
Infotainment operation
92
Infotainment operation 92
Voice control
97
Updating the Infotainment software
99
Infotainment settings - Amundsen 100
Infotainment system settings
100
Radio menu settings 103
Media menu settings 103
Image menu settings
103
Telephone menu settings 104
SmartLink+ menu settings
104
Navigation menu settings 104
Infotainment settings – Swing 106
Infotainment system settings
106
Radio menu settings 108
3
Table of Contents
Media menu settings 108
Telephone menu settings 109
SmartLink+ menu settings 109
Infotainment settings – Blues 109
Infotainment system settings 109
Radio menu settings 110
Media menu settings
110
Radio 111
Operation 111
Media 115
Operation 115
Audio sources
117
Images
122
Image viewer
122
Media Command 123
Using the system
123
Telephone
125
Introductory information
125
Pairing and connecting
126
Telephone functions 128
Text messages (SMS)
131
Data connection
132
Internet connection 132
Connecting via the CarStick device
132
Connecting via WLAN 133
SmartLink+ 134
Introductory information
134
Android Auto 135
Apple CarPlay
136
MirrorLink
®
136
ApplicationŠKODA OneApp 137
Navigation 139
Introductory information 139
Search for destination and enter 141
Saved destinations 144
Import custom destinations 146
Map 148
Route guidance 150
Route
153
Traffic reports 154
Vehicle systems 156
CAR - Vehicle settings 156
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
157
Starting and stopping the engine
157
START-STOP system 159
Braking and parking
160
Manual gear changing and pedals
162
Automatic transmission
163
Running in and economical driving
165
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 166
Assist systems
167
General information
167
Braking and stabilisation systems
168
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
170
Reversing camera 173
Cruise Control System 174
Speed limiter
176
Front Assist 177
Fatigue detection system
180
Tyre pressure monitoring 180
Towing device and trailer 182
Hitch
182
Use the towing device 186
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance 189
Service work, adjustments and technical
alterations 189
Cleaning and care 190
Inspecting and replenishing 195
Fuel
195
Engine compartment 197
Engine oil 199
Coolant 200
Brake fluid 201
Vehicle battery
202
Wheels
204
Wheels and tyres
204
Operating in winter conditions 207
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
208
Emergency equipment
208
Changing a wheel
209
Breakdown kit 212
Jump-starting
215
Towing the vehicle
216
Remote control – Changing the battery 217
Emergency unlocking/locking of doors
218
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 219
Fuses and light bulbs 221
Fuses
221
Bulbs 224
Technical data
Technical data 230
Basic vehicle data 230
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
235
4
Table of Contents
Index
5
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Materials defect liability
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac-
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO grants you the ŠKODA
warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” accord-
ing to the conditions described below.
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will provide the following serv-
ices.
Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of paint work defects on your vehicle that occur within three
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of corrosion caused by rust on the bodywork of your vehicle that
occurs within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only corrosion of
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of cor-
rosion caused by rust on the bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
The start of warranty is the date on which the new car is handed over to the
initial purchaser by the ŠKODA Partner
1)
. This date must be noted down by the
ŠKODA Partner in the Owner's Manual for your vehicle » in the section on the
documentation of the vehicle handover.
Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re-
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner.
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particu-
lar, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a cour-
tesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages.
The ŠKODA warranty is valid at any ŠKODA service partner.
A prerequisite for carrying out work under the ŠKODA warranty is that all
service work has been carried out in a timely and technically correct manner
and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO provisions. It must be proven that
service work has been carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA
AUTO provisions when making a claim on the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of
a missed service or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA
AUTO provisions, you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you
can prove that the missed service or the failure to carry out a service accord-
ing to the ŠKODA AUTO provisions was not the cause of the defect.
Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork, installations or
conversions provided by third parties, or vehicle faults caused as a result. The
same applies to accessories that were not installed and/or delivered ex-facto-
ry.
In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the
following:
Unauthorised use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-
loading), improper care and maintenance or unauthorised modifications to
your vehicle.
Non-compliance with instructions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-
supplied instructions.
External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.).
Parts fitted or connected on or in the vehicle whose use has not been ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
rage or was not rectified properly.
It is the customer's responsibility to prove that s/he is not the cause of the
damage.
This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from
materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims
from product liability laws.
1)
Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific regula-
tions, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the ve-
hicle handover.
6
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
If your vehicle should break down during a journey due to an unexpected de-
fect, you can claim services to ensure your continued mobility under the terms
of the mobility warranty, including the following services: Breakdown assis-
tance at the site of the breakdown and towing to a ŠKODA Service Partner,
technical assistance on the phone or on-site commissioning.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner
may provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation
(bus, train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc.
More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobili-
ty warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They
will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility war-
ranty with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility war-
ranty coverage in place for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA
Service Partner about the possibility of a supplementary agreement.
Optional ŠKODA extended warranty
If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car,
the two-year ŠKODA warranty with regards to carrying out all warranty re-
pairs is extended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has
been reached, whichever occurs first.
The paint warranty and the warranty against corrosion described above are
unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty.
The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils.
The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is
provided by your ŠKODA partner.
Note
The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
7
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
Fig. 1
ŠKODA websites
Your vehicle has various radio systems.
The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that these systems comply
with the requirements of Directive 2014/53/EU.
To display the respective declaration of conformity, proceed as follows.
1. Scan the QR code » Fig. 1 or enter the following address in your web
browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
The web page with a model overview of the ŠKODA brand is opened.
2. Select the desired model - a menu with the manuals is displayed.
3. Select the construction period as well as the language.
4. Select the declaration of conformity file in pdf format.
8
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information
General
Read this Owner's Manual carefully, because operation in accordance with
these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the general binding country-specific legal require-
ments (e.g. transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, road traffic,
etc.) must always be observed.
Always pay attention when driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for
road safety.
The Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle, all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
The Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in the Owner's Manual.
The range of equipment installed in your vehicle depends on the purchase con-
tract for the vehicle. For any questions regarding the scope of equipment,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner.
The pictures in the Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illus-
trations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to
provide general information.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development
with all vehicles. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time
with regard to design, equipment and technology. The information listed in the
Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going
to press.
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-
tions and information contained in the Owner's Manual.
We recommend that the web pages that are referred to in the Owner's Man-
ual are displayed using the classic view. Not all necessary information may be
displayed correctly if the mobile view is chosen.
Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual includes the most important information relating
to vehicle operation. For complete information, see the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual.
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Fig. 2
ŠKODA websites
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual includes full information regard-
ing vehicle operation.
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual is available on the ŠKODA web-
site and in the MyŠKODA App mobile application.
Displaying the electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Scan the QR code » Fig. 2 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
Select the desired model.
Select the construction period as well as the language.
Select the desired Owner's Manual.
9
Introductory information
Tutorial videos
Fig. 3
Tutorial videos
The operation of some vehicle functions can be displayed in the form of video
instructions.
Show menu with video instructions
Scan the QR code » Fig. 3 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals-videos
Note
The video instructions are only available in some language versions.
Application MyŠKODA App
Fig. 4 The MyŠKODA App application is available for devices with the
Android (Google) or iOS (Apple) operating system.
The MyŠKODA App application contains, for example, the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual, quick tips regarding how to resolve certain situations in
relation to the vehicle or a description of the Simply Clever solutions.
You can use this application to get in touch with a ŠKODA partner and to use
its services or to access the breakdown service quickly.
The application can also be used as an RSS reader of favourite websites.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information about the application.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
Installing the MyŠKODA App application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 4 .
10
About the Owner's Manual
Notes
Terms used
- a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist garage can be a ŠKODA partner, a ŠKODA
service partner or an independent workshop.
- A Workshop that has been contractually author-
ised by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to service ŠKODA vehicles and
to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to
service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
- Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
- Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
Marker to the next operation step
Repeatedly pressing the button
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
“Specialist garage”
“ŠKODA Service Partner”
“ŠKODA Partner”
“Press”
“Hold”
11
Introductory information
Online Services
ŠKODA Connect
Service packageŠKODA Connect
The ŠKODA Connect online services extend the vehicle and Infotainment func-
tions with the CareConnect and Infotainment Online service packages.
Care Connect
The CareConnect services include the following features.
Emergency, information and breakdown call.
Proactive service offering to connect with your ŠKODA service partner.
Remote access to the vehicle using the ŠKODA Connect application.
In order for the Care Connect services to work, a mobile network must be
available.
Infotainment online
The Infotainment Online services extend the Infotainment functions, e.g. with
the following functions.
Weather forecast.
Filling station search with information on fuel prices.
Online traffic information.
Online destination search.
The Infotainment system must be connected to the Internet for the
Infotainment Online services to work» page 132.
Terms of use and availability of services
Current “conditions for the use of the user account” incl. “declaration on the
protection of personal data” can be found in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website.
The availability of the services is dependent on the type of vehicle and on the
type of Infotainment system installed in the vehicle. Some services are availa-
ble only in certain countries.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible.
ŠKODA Connect website
Fig. 5 Starting ŠKODA Connect
The ŠKODA Connect website contains information about the online services
and their functions, access to the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, as well as
the option to download the ŠKODA Connect App application.
The ŠKODA Connect website can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 5
or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
User and vehicle registration, activation of online services
Website ŠKODA Connect Portal
Fig. 6
Starting the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
The use of the ŠKODA Connect online services requires prior user and vehicle
registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website as well as activation of on-
line services in the Infotainment system.
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website can be opened by scanning the QR code
» Fig. 6 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
12
Online Services
Information on registering for and activating online services
Fig. 7 Instruction video on how to register for and activate services
Fig. 8
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activa-
tion of services
Instruction video on how to register for and activate services
Registration and activation are carried out in accordance with the instruction
video.
The instruction video can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 7 or enter-
ing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-video
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activation of
services
Current information on registration and activation of Online Services can be
found in the electronic version of the instructions for the Online Services on
the ŠKODA Connect website.
The electronic version of the instructions can be opened by scanning the QR
code » Fig. 8 or by entering the following address in the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-manual
Note
For help with registration, activation as well as the Internet connection, please
contact a ŠKODA service partner.
13
ŠKODA Connect
Activation in Infotainment
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during user and vehicle
registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website.
Wait until the message
Registration complete.
is displayed (can take several mi-
nutes) and confirm the message.
Note
Availability of a GPS signal and a mobile network is required for activation.
In vehicles that only have Infotainment Online Services, a GPS signal must be
available and the Infotainment must be connected with the Internet for activa-
tion.
The list of services can be displayed » page 14, Display of service manage-
ment.
Deleting/switching the vehicle user
Deleting the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
Delete owner
Delete
and confirm the delete process.
Changing the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
New owner
Transfer ownership
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during registration of
the new user and during vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website.
If necessary, confirm the change of user by tapping the function surface
Change main users
.
Note
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user account on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website, the user is also deleted in the infotainment system.
Managing online services
Display of service management
In Services Management, it is possible to display information about the online
services, the validity of their license, or to switch the services on/off.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
.
To display the designations and the status of the services, select the de-
sired service.
For detailed information about the service tap the function surface .
To switch the services on/off, tap the function surface with “Checkbox”.
Switching online services on/off in the Infotainment system
Switching
Private mode
function on/off
By switching the
Private mode
function on, the services relating to sending vehi-
cle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of serv-
ices, are deactivated.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Private mode
.
Switching Care Connect services on/off
By switching the Care Connect services off, the services relating to sending
vehicle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of
services, are deactivated.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Care Connect
.
Switching Infotainment Online services on/off
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Infotainment Online
.
Note
The emergency call remains fully functional after activation of the
Private mode
function or after deactivation of Care Connect. The functions of the informa-
tion and breakdown call are limited.
14
Online Services
Activated localisation services
Fig. 9
Symbols of activated localisa-
tion services
For the complete functionality of some online services, activated localisation
services are required.
Localisation services include, for example, information on the last parking posi-
tion, area notification or speed notification.
When localisation services are active, one of the following symbols will be dis-
played in the status line in the Infotainment screen » Fig. 9,
Emergency call
Fig. 10
Emergency call button
Automatic start of a call with the emergency call centre
In the event of an accident, a call is automatically started with the emergency
call centre. The emergency call centre simultaneously receives information on
the accident, e.g. the location and severity of the accident, the number of oc-
cupants with fastened seatbelts and the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Manual start of a call with the emergency call centre
Press and hold the
B
» Fig. 10 button.
In the Infotainment screen or on the instrument cluster display, confirm the
connection setup.
The call can be started manually, for example, if you are reporting an accident
in which you were not directly involved.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 10.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The emergency service is functional even without user registration and activa-
tion of services.
Care Connect Services
Proactive service
Fig. 11
Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services
The proactive service provides an overview of the technical status of your ve-
hicle and on any due service events. It is also possible to establish a connection
to the information or breakdown call centre.
15
ŠKODA Connect
Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services » Fig. 11
Warning light for system status.
Press this button to establish a call to the information number in the
event of problems with the online services or for information regarding
the products and services of the ŠKODA brand.
Press this button to establish a call to the breakdown number in the event
of a breakdown.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 11.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
Remote access to the vehicle
Fig. 12 ŠKODA Connect application
With the remote access to the vehicle service, you can access some vehicle
functions via the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or the ŠKODA Connect ap-
plication installed on your mobile device.
Installing the ŠKODA Connect mobile application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 12 .
Remote access to the vehicle includes, for example, the following services.
Driving data.
Vehicle condition.
Last parking position.
A
B
C
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
Infotainment Online services
Main menu and overview of services
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 13
Main menu
These services extend the functionality of the Internet-connected Infotain-
ment.
To display the main menu » Fig. 13, press the button

, the tap the function
surface
.
News from the RSS channels set in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website
Online search for filling stations with information on fuel prices » page 143
Online search for car parks with information on free parking spaces
» page 143
Weather forecast near the vehicle position, the destination of the route or
in the vicinity of the selected location
Online POI search » page 141
Import of the destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website » page 147
Import of the routes created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website » page 154
Online import of POI Categories » page 139
16
Online Services
Conditions for the use of Online Services
Settings of Online Services » page 102
For more information on the available services, see the ŠKODA Connect web-
site» page 12.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
17
ŠKODA Connect
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Introduction
In this section of the instructions you will find important information on the
subject of passive safety. We have combined everything here which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of
children and anything similar.
Other important safety information can also be found in the subsequent sec-
tions of this Owner's Manual. The Owner's Manual should therefore always be
kept in the vehicle.
Before setting off
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
Check the lights and turn signal lights are functioning correctly.
Check the wiper function and the wiper blades for wear. Check the wind-
screen washer fluid level.
Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
that the mirrors are not covered.
Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle.
Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
Ensure that no parts and components are visibly loose in the vehicle.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children using a suitable child seat » page 28, Transporting children
safely.
Adopt the correct seated position. Tell your passengers to assume the cor-
rect seated position » page 18, Correct and safe seating position.
Driving safety
For safety in traffic, the following precautions must be observed.
Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g.
by your passengers or mobile phone calls).
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol, drugs or similar).
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
Correct and safe seating position
Introduction
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
Do not sit facing to one side.
Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your limbs out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
18
Safety
WARNING
The adjustable seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match
the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened proper-
ly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 28, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury!
WARNING
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries.
Driver’s correct seated position
Fig. 14
Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel
position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 14 -
A
.
Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is, where possi-
ble, at the same level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with
integrated headrests) » Fig. 14 -
B
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Using seat belts.
WARNING
A distance of least 25 cm to the steering wheel should be maintained,
otherwise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - hazard!
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 14. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, you could
sustain serious injury to the arms, hands and head if the airbag is activated.
Ensure there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get be-
hind the pedals while driving. You would then no longer be able to operate
the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 15 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
Turn the safety lever beneath the steering wheel towards the arrow
1
» Fig. 15.
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in direction of arrow
2
.
Pull the holder until it stops in arrow direction
3
.
19
Passive Safety
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary!
The safety lever must always be locked so that the steering wheel cannot
accidentally change position – risk of accident!
Passenger’s correct seating position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 14 on page 19 -
B
(not
for seats with integrated headrest).
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Using seat belts.
WARNING
A distance of least 25 cm to the dashboard should be maintained, other-
wise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - hazard!
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
seated position!
Passengers’ correct seating position on the rear seats
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For the safety of the passengers in the rear seats, and to reduce the risk of in-
jury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is,
where possible, at the same level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 14 on
page 19-
B
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Using seat belts.
20
Safety
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable
extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well re-
sult in severe injuries.
When transporting a child the following instructions must be observed
» page 28, Transporting children safely.
WARNING
Fasten seat belts before every ride! This also applies to other passengers -
there is a danger of injury!
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
» page 18, Correct and safe seating position.
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of the safety belts
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – on no ac-
count across your neck.
No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to-
gether.
WARNING (Continued)
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
Do not attach clamps or similar objects to the belt - the function of the
belt retractor could be restricted.
The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when
the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 70.
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
pair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 193.
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If damage to
the parts of the seat belt system (e.g. the strap, the belt connectors, the re-
tractor, the lock or similar) are detected, the seat belt in question must be
replaced immediately by a specialist.
Seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident should be
replaced by a specialist garage. Also check the seat belt anchors.
Correct routing of seat belt
Fig. 16
Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap
belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
21
Seat belts
Fig. 17 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Read and observe on page 21 first.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder belt should be positioned approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (on no account across your neck) and lie flush to the chest » Fig. 16 -
.
The lower part of the belt should run across the pelvis (it should not lie on top
of the stomach) and must always fit snugly » Fig. 16 -
.
For pregnant women, the lower part of the belt must be positioned as low
down as possible across the pelvis, to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower
abdomen » Fig. 16 -
.
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Push the seat belt guide loop upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 17 -
.
Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows
1
and push the
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 17 - .
Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place and that the belt is blocked reliably » page 23, Iner-
tia reels.
WARNING
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. pencils,
spectacles, pens, keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 18
Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Read and observe on page 21 first.
Before fastening the belt
Adjust the headrest properly (does not apply to seats with integrated headr-
ests).
Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats).
Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
Fasten
Slowly pull the belt over the chest and pelvis.
Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle » Fig. 18 that is part of the
seat until it clicks into place.
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Release
Grip the lock tongue and press the red button in the buckle » Fig. 18 - , the
lock tongue pops out.
22
Safety
Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the
webbing rolls up fully.
WARNING
The reel opening for the lock tongue must not be blocked otherwise the
lock tongue will not lock into place properly.
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts
also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill
and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
belts.
If there is a collision of a certain severity, the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a roll-over, minor collisions or
in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
Note
The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
23
Seat belts
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Introduction
The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional occu-
pant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions.
The airbag will only provide optimum protection in conjunction with wear-
ing the seat belt - the airbag is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 41.
System description
Fig. 19 Airbag installation points
Airbag installation points » Fig. 19
Front airbags
Side airbags
Head airbags
A
B
C
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the remaining body parts is
thus reduced.
Front airbags - head and upper body. The airbags can be identified by the
lettering  featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the
passenger side.
Side airbags - for the entire upper body (chest, stomach, pelvis) on the side
next to the door. The air bags can be identified by a label with the lettering
 marked on the front seat backrests.
Head airbags - head and neck. The airbags are provided with the lettering
 marked on the B-pillar cladding.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts.
Individual airbags.
Warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 41.
Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 27.
Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 27.
Airbag deployment
Fig. 20 Inflated airbags
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
When triggered, the airbag fills with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the air-
bag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
24
Safety
When the airbag inflates, smoke is released. This is not a sign of a fire in the
vehicle.
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. The important factors here are the hard-
ness of the object with which the vehicle collides, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed etc.
The deceleration during impact plays an important role in the deployment of
the airbags. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured remains
below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the
bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
Driver’s front airbag.
Front passenger airbag.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side
collision.
Front side airbag.
Head airbag.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
The hazard warning lights are switched on.
All the doors are unlocked.
The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is
switched on - position ).
When there is no air bag deployment?
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment.
Safety instructions
Fig. 21
Safe distance from the steering
wheel and dashboard
WARNING
General information
The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer proper protection
if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 18.
The airbag unleashes enormous force when triggered, which can lead to
serious injuries or fatalities if the driver and passengers are not seated
properly. This applies in particular to children who are transported without
using a suitable child safety seat » page 30.
If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
the event of an accident.
If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must then be replaced.
The surface of the steering wheel and the dashboard should only be
cleaned with a dry or slightly dampened cloth in the area of the front air-
bags.
WARNING
Information about the front airbags
For the driver and passenger, it is important to maintain a distance of at
least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard » Fig. 21 -
A
. If this dis-
tance is not maintained, the airbag system cannot protect you - hazard! The
front seats and the head restraints must always be correctly adjusted to
match the body size of the occupant.
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 26, Airbag deactivation. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is deployed.
25
Airbag system
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Fig. 22 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
Positions of the key switch » Fig. 22 -
The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the indicator light illuminates
1)

» Fig. 22 -
The front passenger airbag is activated - the warning light does not light
up when the ignition is turned on 
Switch off
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
On the radio key, fold the key bit out fully » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position

.
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
Check that the warning light  lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
On the radio key, fold the key bit out fully » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .


Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
Check that the warning light  does not light up after the ignition is
switched on.
WARNING
The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag could be
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death!
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
If the  warning light is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in an accident! Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately.
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
1)
The warning light

comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, goes out for about 1
second and then comes on again.
27
Airbag system
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Introduction
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, children should only be transported
in child seats!
Please refer to the instructions in this Owner's Manual and the child seat man-
ufacturer's instructions with regard to the installation and use of the child seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport children on the
rear seats. Only transport a child on the passenger seat in exceptional circum-
stances.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
standard must be used.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number
below.
WARNING
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children might not be capable of leaving the vehicle or helping themselves
independently in the event of an emergency. Can be fatal at very high or
very low temperatures!
The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
WARNING (Continued)
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
head restraints so that they are as high as possible.
If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even
in the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 71. After re-
moving the child seat, refit the head restraints.
Note
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
28
Safety
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 1)
Does not apply to Taiwan
Fig. 23
Warning labels
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is pro-
tected by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, or
even death.
This warning is also given on stickers that are located in the following places.
On the passenger sun visor» Fig. 23 -
.
On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 23
.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
It is essential to deactivate the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in
which the child is transported with its back facing the direction of travel »
.
If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical, so
as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not
“jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of in-
jury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Once a child seat in which the child is transported with its back to the di-
rection of travel is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag should be reactivated.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 2)
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 24
Warning labels
Read and observe on page 28 first.
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat.
A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » Fig. 24.
29
Transporting children safely
Child safety and the side airbag
Fig. 25
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly se-
cured – risk from the side air-
bag/Child properly protected by
safety seat
Read and observe on page 28 first.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
» Fig. 25 -
.
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
the side airbag that the airbag can provide as much protection as possible
» Fig. 25
.
Classification of child seats
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
Outside
Rear seat
Centre
0
up to 10 kg
U U U
0+
up to 13 kg
U U U
1
9-18 kg
U U U
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
Outside
Rear seat
Centre
2
15-25 kg
U U U
a)
3
22-36 kg
U U U
a)
a)
If the middle rear seat is not provided with a headrest, then a child seat of Group 2 or 3 is only to be used if
this has its own built-in headrest. If the child seat of Group 2 or 3 does not have its own built-in headrest,
the child seat must be attached to the outer rear seat.
“Universal” child seat category - a child seat designed to be attached to
the seat using the seat belt.
U
30
Safety
Fastening systems
Attachment points of the -system
Fig. 26
Labels of the system 

is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.
There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the child
in place using the

-system » Fig. 26.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the -system – risk
of death!
Note
A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Child seats with the -system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.
Use of child safety seats with the  system
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class of
the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E X IL-SU X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X IL-SU XD
C
1
9-18 kg
D
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
C
B
B1
A
31
Transporting children safely
Group
Size class of
the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
2
15-25 kg
- X IL-SU X
3
22-36 kg
- X IL-SU X
a)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
IL-SU The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in  in the “Semi-Universal”category. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat with the -system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of a  child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the   system belt.
X The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points.
Attachment points of the  -system
Fig. 27
Attachment points of the 
-system
  is an attachment system that restricts the movement of the upper
part of the child seat.
The locking eyes
A
for attaching the belt of a child seat with the


system are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests » Fig. 27.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
Only use child seats with the   system on the seats equipped with
attachment points with the logo  .
Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
32
Safety
33
Transporting children safely
Fig. 28 Cockpit example for LHD models
34
Operation
Operation
Cockpit
Overview
Electric power windows 58
Door opening lever
55
Electric exterior mirror adjustment 68
Air outlet vents 89
Ticket holder 73
Operating lever (depending on equipment):
Indicator light and high-beam headlight 61
Speed regulating system
174
Speed limiter 176
Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front airbag
24
Buttons for operating the information system
46
Instrument cluster
36
Operating lever:
Windscreen wipers and washers
67
Information system
46
Depending on equipment fitted:
Storage compartment
74
Infotainment
90
Button for hazard warning light system 64
Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag 27
Interior rear-view mirror
68
Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment)
27
Front passenger airbag 24
External infotainment module (in the front passenger storage
compartment)
92
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 77
Electric power window in the front passenger door
58
Storage compartments 73
Light switch 60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Headlight range control (in the dashboard) 60
Bonnet release lever 198
Steering wheel locking lever 19
Depending on equipment fitted:
Ignition lock
158
Starter button
158
Storage compartment 74
Handbrake lever
161
Depending on equipment fitted:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 162
Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 163
Cup holder 74
AUX/USB input
74
Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
Left seat heating 72
Traction control (TCS)
168
Parking aid
170
Central locking system
54
Rear window heater 65
START STOP
159
Windscreen heater
65
Right seat heating
72
Controls for heating/air conditioning
86
Note
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in this layout » Fig. 28.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
35
Cockpit
Instruments and warning lights
Instrument cluster
Introduction
Fig. 29
Instrument cluster - Version 1
Fig. 30 Instrument cluster - Version 2
Engine revolutions counter » page 36
with warning lights » page 37
Display » page 46
1
2
Speedometer
with warning lights » page 37
Bar with warning lights » page 37
Operation key:
Set the time » page 46
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 46
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
» page 51
Coolant temperature gauge » page 37
Fuel gauge » page 37
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to
switch on the lights in due time.
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in the Infotainment
menu

Light
.
Rev counter
The tachometer
1
» Fig. 29 on page 36 or » Fig. 30 on page 36 shows the
actual engine speed per minute.
The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maxi-
mum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D/S on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 47.
CAUTION
The rev counter pointer may only move into the red area for a short time - oth-
erwise risk of engine damage!
3
4
5
6
7
36
Operation
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 31
Coolant temperature gauge
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster variant 1 » Fig. 29 on page 36.
The display » Fig. 31 only works if the ignition is switched on.
Cold range - the pointer is in the range
A
, the engine has not yet reached its
operating temperature. Avoid high speeds and high engine loads.
Operating range - the pointer is in the range
B
.
High temperature range - the pointer is in the range
C
. The coolant tempera-
ture is too high. The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster
» page 43.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 32 Fuel gauge: in the instrument cluster / the display of the instru-
ment cluster
The display » Fig. 32 only works if the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level
A
or
B
, the warning light illumi-
nates in the instrument cluster» page 41.
WARNING
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel can
cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the ex-
haust system.
Note
The arrow next to the symbol within the fuel gauge displays the installa-
tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
Warning lights
Introduction
Handbrake » page 38
Brake system » page 38
Front seat belt warning light » page 39
Power steering
Steering lock (engine start push-button)
» page 39
Stabilisation control (ESC)
Traction control (ASR)
» page 39
Traction control (ASR) deactivated » page 40
Antilock brake system (ABS) » page 40
Rear fog light » page 40
Exhaust control system » page 40
Glow plug system (diesel engine) » page 40
 EPC fault light (petrol engine) » page 40
Airbag system » page 41
Tyre pressure » page 41
37
Instruments and warning lights
Fuel reserve » page 41
Turning signal system » page 42
Trailer turn signal lights » page 42
Fog lights » page 42
Speed regulating system
Speed limiter
» page 42
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) » page 42
High beam » page 42
Automatic gearbox » page 42
Rear seat belt warning light » page 43
Alternator » page 43
Coolant » page 43
Engine oil pressure » page 43
Engine oil level » page 44
Bulb failure » page 44
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) » page 44
Windscreen washer fluid level » page 45
Headlight assist » page 45
START-STOP system » page 45
Display of a low temperature » page 45
Distance warning (Front Assist) » page 45
Advance warning/emergency braking (Front
Assist)
» page 45
Emergency call » page 45
Service » page 45
The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go
out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
The warning lights are at the following locations in the instrument cluster
» Fig. 29 on page 36or » Fig. 30 on page 36.
Engine revolutions counter
1
Display
2
Speedometer
3
Bar with warning lights
4
Warning lights in the display
Depending on the importance the warning light(danger) or(warning) illu-
minates along with some of the warning lights in the bar with the warning
lights.
WARNING
Ignoring illuminated indicator lights and related messages or instructions
in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or dam-
age to the vehicle.
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning lights » page 64. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed dis-
tance.
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 197.
handbrake
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the handbrake has been applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the
handbrake is still on.
Release the handbrake.
Braking system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low.
Park the vehicle, do not continue to drive! Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.
38
Operation
WARNING
A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance -
risk of accident!
Front seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
At a speed of over 25 km/h, the warning light flashes and an audible warning
sounds at the same time.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light
illuminates permanently.
Power steering/steering lock (engine start with button
press)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Fault in the power steering
lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
lights up – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces can be higher.
Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance.
If the warning light
does not go off, stop the vehicle,
do not continue
to drive. Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the warning light does not go out, it is possible to continue driving with
due caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Steering lock defective (engine start push-button)
flashes
Message:
Steering lock faulty. Stop!
STOP VEHICLE STEERING FAULTY
Park the vehicle, and stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no
longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components
(e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
flashes
Message:
Steering lock: workshop!
STEERING WORKSHOP
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Steering lock not unlocked (engine start push-button)
flashes
Message:
Please move the steering wheel.
MOVE STEERING WHEEL
Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock-
ing the steering lock.
If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is re-
quired.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning
light
illuminates after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
out, there is a system error.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction control (TCS)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently active.
lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
39
Instruments and warning lights
If the warning light comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
switched off for technical reasons.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
the ASR is fully functional again.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
More information about the ESC system » page 168 or TCS system
» page 168.
Traction control (TCS) deactivated
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the TCS system is deactivated.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is an ABS fault.
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If the warning light illuminates simultaneously with warning light
» page 38, Braking system, do not continue your journey! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
Rear fog light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the rear fog light is switched on.
Emission control system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system makes
it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Preheating unit (diesel)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light
does not come
on or illuminates continuously.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.

EPC warning light (petrol)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
 lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
40
Operation
Airbag system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
System fault
Illuminates
Message:
Error: airbag
AIRBAG ERROR
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
tool
lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
flashes for approximately 12 seconds
Message:
Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated.
AIRBAG/ BELT TENSIONER OFF
WARNING
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
checked immediately by a specialized garage.
Tyre pressure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Change of tyre pressure values
lights up – there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 205.
Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the affected wheel
» page 209 or use the repair kit » page 212.
Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 181.
System fault
flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system
error.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Other incidents
The illumination of the warning light
can have the following reasons.
The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
Snow chains are mounted.
A wheel has been changed.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light in the instrument cluster may be delayed or not
light up at all.
Fuel reserve
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approximately
7 litres).
Fill up with fuel » page 195.
41
Instruments and warning lights
Note
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
Turn signal system
Read and observe
on page 38 first.
flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its
normal rate (does not apply when towing).
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Trailer turn signal lights
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on.
If a trailer is hitched and the warning light
is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
Check the trailer bulbs.
Fog lights
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the fog lights are switched on.
Speed regulating system/speed limiter
Read and observe on page 38 first.
illuminates - the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control or the
speed limiter.
flashes – the speed set with the speed limiter has been exceeded.
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – apply the brake.
Main beam
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on.
Automatic gearbox
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Gearbox overheated
The warning light
is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
GEARBOX OVERHEATED
The gearbox has over-heated, continued driving is possible with appropriate
caution.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT
Do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
If the warning light does not go out, do not continue driving! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
Transmission problem
The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely!
GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP
42
Operation
Park the vehicle, do not continue to drive!. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear.
GEARBOX ERROR REV_ GEAR NOT AVAIL
or
Error: gearbox. Speed is limited.
GEARBOX ERROR
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Rear seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened.
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
and indicates the current belt status!
Generator
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.
As the vehicle discharges while driving, all non-essential electrical loads (e.g.
Infotainment) should be switched off.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
If in addition to the light the light lights up while driving, stop driving -
risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage.
Coolant
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Coolant level too low
lights up
Message:
Please check the coolant level. Log book!
ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down.
Check the coolant level » page 200.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light illumi-
nates again, there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
Switch off the ignition.
Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light
illumi-
nates again,
do not continue driving!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Coolant temperature too high
lights up
Message:
Engine overheat. Stop! Check the log book.
ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down.
Continue your journey only after the warning light
has disappeared.
Engine oil pressure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
Even if the oil level is correct, do not drive any further if the warning light
is flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
43
Instruments and warning lights
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Engine oil level
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Engine oil level too low
lights up
Message:
Please add engine oil.
ADD OIL
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
if necessary.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
onds. If the engine oil is not replenished, the warning light will come on again
after driving about 100 km.
Engine oil level too high
lights up
Message:
Please reduce oil level.
OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Fault on the engine oil level sensor
lights up
Message:
Oil sensor: please visit workshop.
OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Lamp failure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – one of the lamps is faulty.
A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp.
Diesel particle filter (diesel)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The diesel particulate filter separates and burns the soot particles from the ex-
haust.
lights up – the filter is clogged with soot.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light
goes out.
4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic transmission: position D / S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
Engine speed between 1,800-2,500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light
extinguishes.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light
does not go out and
the warning light
begins to flash.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-
rain and traffic conditions.
The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into con-
tact with flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spil-
led fuel or the like.
44
Operation
CAUTION
As long as the warning light illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
Note
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the
combustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter.
Windscreen washer fluid level
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
Top up the windscreen washer fluid » page 199.
Headlight assist
Read and observe on page 38 first.
illuminates – headlight assist is activated » page 62, Headlight assist (Light
Assist).
START-STOPsystem
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The warning lights indicate the status of the START-STOP sys-
tem» page 159.
Display of a low temperature
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
WARNING
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road
surface! You should therefore not only rely on the outside temperature dis-
play for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
Front Assist
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini-
mum.
Information on the Front Assist system » page 177.
Advance warning / Emergency braking (Front Assist)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the system has recognized the risk of a collision or automatically
triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre » page 177.
Emergency call
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is a fault in the emergency call system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Service
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – information regarding a service appointment that is due
» page 51, Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval.
45
Instruments and warning lights
Information system
Driver information system
Display in the instrument cluster
Fig. 33 Display types: MAXI DOT/Segment Display
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 33.
Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Compass display
Driving data (multifunction display)
Warning lights
Information messages
Door alarm
Service interval display
Outside temperature
Cruise control/speed limiter
Total distance travelled
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Time
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outside temperature
Warning lights
Driving data (multifunction display)
Total distance travelled
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Cruise control/speed limiter
Service interval display
Information messages
Fuel gauge
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning
appears in the display.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
Press button
A
» Fig. 34 on page 46.
Setting the time
Fig. 34
Button in the instrument cluster
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 34 until the
time
is shown in the display.
Release the button
A
and the system switches to the hour setting function.
Press the button
A
again and set the hours.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting.
Press the button
A
again and set the minutes.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting.
9
10
11
46
Operation
Gear recommendation
Fig. 35
Information on the selected
gear / Gear recommendation
A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
Display » Fig. 35
Optimal gear engaged
Gear recommendation (e.g.
means that it is advantageous to switch
from 3rd to 4th gear)
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations (e.g. when overtaking).
Vehicle status
Fig. 36
Vehicle status
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster.
As long as the faults are not rectified the messages are always shown. After
the message is displayed for the first time, the warning lights (danger) or
(warning) continue to be displayed.
The vehicle status can be displayed in the Infotainment in menu

Vehicle status
.
In the screen, information regarding vehicle condition or function of the tyre
pressure monitor is displayed.
Using the function surfaces , select the Vehicle status menu item.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 36
A
Vehicle representation (the zones of the vehicle are shown in different
colours, corresponding to any warning messages that occur. The warn-
ing messages are displayed once you touch the “vehicle”)
 No message/warning messages relating to vehicle status and the num-
ber (if there is only one message, one warning message text is dis-
played)
Display information about the status of the START-STOP system
Activation/deactivation of messages relating to the START-STOP
system messages in another screen display
Operation of the information system
Operation via the operating lever
Fig. 37
Buttons on the control lever
47
Information system
Operating the multifunction display
Press (up or down) - select data / set values
Press show / confirm entry
Operating the MAXI DOT display
Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 38
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Switch on/off voice control
Turn - sets the volume
Press - sound on / off
Skip to next track/station
Switch to previous track/station
Display the assistance systems menu
Press - display the Telephone menu, accept/end the call; call selected con-
tact
Hold - repeat last call; reject call
Operating the multifunction display
Turn - select data / set values
Press show / confirm entry
A
B
A
B
A
B
Operating the MAXI DOT display
Hold - display main menu
Press - return to a previous level in the menu
Turn - move in the selected menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Driving data (Multifunction display)
Introduction
The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on.
The units can be set in the Infotainment in the

Units
menu.
Information Overview
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca-
pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value
can increase.
Average fuel consumption - is calculated continuously since the last clearing
of the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 100
m driven.
Current fuel consumption - when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly,
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (in models in some countries the fol-
lowing appears --,- km/l).
Oil temperature - if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in
the system for checking the oil temperature, the  symbols are displayed.
Warning when the preset speed is exceeded - allows the setting of a speed
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message ap-
pears on the display of the instrument cluster.
Current speed - digital speedometer.
Average speed - value constantly recalculated, for distance since last clearing
the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Distance driven - distance driven since the memory was last cleared.
B
48
Operation
Driving time - driving time since last clearing the memory.
Coolant temperature - if the coolant temperature is in the range 70-120 °C,
the engine operating temperature has been reached. If the temperature is be-
low 70 ° C, high engine speeds and straining the engine should be avoided. If
the temperature is above 120 ° C, the warning light illuminates in the instru-
ment cluster » page 43.
Infotainment display
Fig. 39
Driving data
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Driving data
.
Screen display » Fig. 39
Distance travelled
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Transit point rating (
DriveGreen
Function)
Graphic fuel level display (if the estimated range is less than 300 km, the
vehicle starts to approach the symbol )
Approximate range
Use the function surfaces to select one of the following presets.
Since start - Driving data for the individual trip
Long-term - Long-term driving data
Since refuel - Data since refuelling
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Warning at when exceeding the set speed
The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
Select the menu item
Warning at
at () or () and confirm.
The desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps.
Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Select the menu item
Warning at
at () or () and confirm.
Drive at the desired speed.
Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
Reset speed limit
Select the menu item
Warning at
at (
) or
(
) and confirm.
By confirming the speed stored in the memory, the speed limit is reset.
The set driving mode remains stored even after switching the ignition on and
off. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
deactivated.
Memory
Fig. 40
Memory display: MAXI DOT dis-
play () / Segment display ()
The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are
displayed at the position
A
» Fig. 40.
49
Information system
Since start
() or “1” ()
Driving data is stored from when the ignition is switched on to when it is
switched off. If the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ig-
nition, new data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving infor-
mation.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Long-term
() and “2” ()
The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to
a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 kilometres driven.
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is
exceeded.
Since refuel
(
) or “3” (
)
The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling.
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up.
For the storage choice, repeatedly confirm the selected indication and se-
lect the desired memory.
For deleting the memory for the selected information, hold down the button
confirming the specification.
The following Driving data is stored in different memory banks.
Average fuel consumption
Distance travelled
Average speed
Driving time
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
MAXI DOT display
Introduction
The MAXI DOT display is a user interface which, depending on the equipment
configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the multifunction
display, the assistance systems etc.
The instrument cluster display is a user interface which, depending on the
equipment configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the
multifunction display, the assistance systems etc.
The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 47.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
Driving data
» page 48
Assist systems
» page 51
Navigation
» page 50
Audio
» page 50
Telephone
» page 51;
Vehicle
» page 47
Note
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
to access the main menu.
The display language can be set in the Infotainment » page 100, Infotainment
language settings or » page 107, Infotainment language settings.
For vehicles without Infotainment, the display language can only be adjusted
by a specialist garage.
Menu item
Navigation
The following information is displayed in the
Navigation
menu item.
Driving recommendations
Compass
Last destinations
Menu item
Audio
The following information is displayed in the
Audio
menu item.
Radio
Currently playing station (name/frequency).
The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the
station button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
TP traffic announcements.
50
Operation
Media
Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source.
Menu
Telephone
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the
Telephone
menu item.
Incoming call
Outgoing call
Missed call
Symbols in the display
Telephone battery charge (this function is only supported by some mobile
phones)
Signal strength (this function is only supported by some mobile phones)
A telephone connected to the Infotainment system
Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown
next to the symbol)
Switch-off microphone
Apple CarPlay
An external device connected to the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay
can be operated via the multifunction steering wheel as well as via menus in
the instrument cluster display.
The following symbols are displayed in the
Telephone
menu option.
Answer the incoming call
Reject incoming call / end call
Activate / deactivate microphone (applies for the infotainment Swing)
Menu item
Assist systems
In the menu item
Assist systems
, the Front Assist system can be activated/deac-
tivated.
Service intervals
Introduction
Compliance with the service intervals is of crucial importance for the serv-
ice life and value retention of the vehicle. Never exceed the service date.
The specialist garage will inform you about the type of service interval, the op-
tion to change it, and the service scope.
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will notify
you when a service is due.
Proof of service
A specialist garage will confirm the corresponding service record in the service
information system called Digital Service Plan.
We recommend that you always print out the respective service record.
Note
The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including
changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated
otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other binding agreements.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
Fig. 41
Button in the instrument cluster
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 41 until the
Service
menu item is shown in
the display.
Release the button
A
.
In the display, the symbol appears for 4 seconds along with the following
message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
51
Information system
Information regarding the remaining kilometres and days until the next service
appointment can also be displayed in Infotainment in menu

Service
.
Service messages
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol as well as a
message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the
display after the ignition is switched on.
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol appears in the display after
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
Resetting the service interval display
Have the display reset by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display can cause problems to the vehicle.
Variable service interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis-
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating
conditions of the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Introduction
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 55.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle doors have been
locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorised
persons (e.g. children) could lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition or start
the engine - danger of injury and accidents!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
Keep the key grooves clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a nega-
tive effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
52
Operation
Unlocking/locking with the key via the lock cylinder
Fig. 42
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
the key for unlocking and lock-
ing the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 42
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
CAUTION
If the locking cylinder is provided with a cap, the cap must be removed before
unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » page 218.
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Fig. 43
Key with pop-out key bit
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Description of the key » Fig. 43
Unlock button
Lock button
Button for unlocking/unlatching the boot lid
Button for popping out/pushing in the key bit
Battery status warning light - if the warning light does not flash when you
press a button on the key, the battery is discharged.
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
Press the button to unlock the lid.
Hold down the button to unlock and unlatch the lid (partially opened).
If the lid is unlocked or released with the button, then the lid is automatical-
ly locked after closing. The period of time after which the flap is locked can be
set » page 58.
CAUTION
The remote control may be affected by signal superimposition by transmit-
ters close to the vehicle.
The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be re-
placed if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
less than approximately 3 m away » page 218.
Locking/unlocking - KESSY
Fig. 44 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
Grip the door handle to unlock » Fig. 44 - the vehicle.
Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger to lock » Fig. 44 -
the vehicle.
A
B
53
Unlocking and opening
When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Information on locking
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by
touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is
locked.
The KESSY system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the button
on the key » page 54.
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
If one of the doors is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which
the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn signal lights
will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle is au-
tomatically locked again.
If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatical-
ly unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.
Deactivating KESSY
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.
To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds and then pull the door
handle. The door must remain locked.
The KESSY system is activated again automatically after the vehicle is un-
locked.
Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button
Fig. 45
Central locking button
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button.
The vehicle is not locked from the outside.
All doors are closed.
To lock/unlock, press the
» Fig. 45 button.
Locking is indicated by illumination of the
symbol in the button.
The following applies after locking.
Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
SafeLock
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
SafeLock prevents the doors from being opened from inside as well as win-
dow operation. This makes an attempted break-in to the vehicle more difficult.
Activating
SafeLock is activated when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
54
Operation
This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the in-
strument cluster after the ignition is switched off.
Check SAFELOCK! Owner's manual!
CHECK SAFELOCK
Activation display
When SafeLock is activated, the warning light in the driver's door flashes for 2
seconds in rapid succession, then starts to flash at longer intervals.
Deactivating
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
or: by deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection
» page 57.
The warning light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, then
goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
The SafeLock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people
must remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door
or open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult
for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
Individual settings
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The following functions of central locking can be individually adjusted in the In-
fotainment menu

Opening and closing
.
All doors
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
Single door
The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors
and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
touched.
Doors on a vehicle side
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the fuel
filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of
both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The
other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is un-
locked or touched.
Automatic locking/unlocking
This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
15 km / h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
Opening/closing the door
Fig. 46
Door handle/door opening lever
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
To open from the outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle
A
in
the direction of the arrow » Fig. 46.
To open from the inside, pull the door opening lever
B
and push the door
away from you.
55
Unlocking and opening
To lock from the inside, grab handle
C
and close the door.
WARNING
The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion - can be fatal!
Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
Child safety lock
Fig. 47 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Switching on and off
Toturn on the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position » Fig. 47.
To turn off the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position .
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Synchronising the remote control
If the buttons on the remote control key have been depressed several times
beyond the effective range of the equipment or the battery has been replaced
in the remote control key and the vehicle cannot be unlocked with the remote
control, the key must be synchronised.
Press any button on the remote control key.
Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Fault with the central locking
If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
In the event of a failure in the central locking system, the vehicle doors and the
boot lid can emergency locked or unlocked » page 218.
Failure of the system KESSY
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the
battery » page 218.
Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm).
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release.
56
Operation
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, check that all doors and windows are closed in or-
der to ensure that the alarm system is fully operational.
Note
The alarm system has its own power source, whose service life is 5 years. In
order to ensure functionality of the alarm system, we recommend that you get
the alarm checked after this time by a specialist garage.
Alarm trigger
Read and observe on page 57 first.
The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is acti-
vated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
Opening the bonnet.
Opening the boot lid.
Opening the doors.
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
Towing the vehicle.
Movement in the vehicle.
Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system.
Uncoupling the trailer.
An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the lock cylinder.
The alarm is switched off by pressing the
button on the key or switching on
the ignition.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Fig. 48
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Read and observe on page 57 first.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
triggers the alarm.
The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm.
These functions should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm
will be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle
interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed.
Deactivation
Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
Press the button on the centre column on the driver side » Fig. 48; the
symbol lights up in the button.
Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
Safelock is switched off during deactivation.
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in-
terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
Boot lid
Introduction
WARNING
Never drive with the boot lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust
gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack
– risk of injury!
57
Unlocking and opening
Opening / closing the boot lid
Fig. 49 Opening / closing tailgate
Read and observe on page 57 first.
To open the boot lid, press button
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 49.
Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
2
.
To close, grab the mount
B
and pull in the direction of arrow
3
.
Note
Button
A
» Fig. 49 is disabled when starting off or driving at a speed of over 5
km/h. The button is reactivated when the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
Delayed locking of the boot lid
Read and observe on page 57 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the button
on the key, then the boot lid is
automatically locked after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically.
Window operation
Introduction
WARNING
Always close the window carefully and in a controlled manner. Otherwise,
you may cause considerable crushing injuries to yourself or fellow passen-
gers.
Power windows in the driver's door and the rear doors are equipped with
a force limiter » page 59. If there is an obstacle (e.g. If a body part gets
trapped), the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by
several centimetres. However, the windows should be closed carefully –
risk of injury!
CAUTION
Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct func-
tionality of the electric windows.
Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery.
Note
If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle
and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds.
Mechanical windows
Fig. 50 Window Operation: Left/right
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
A
» Fig. 50.
58
Operation
To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
B
.
Electric power windows
Fig. 51 Buttons for window-openers: Version 1/version 2
Fig. 52
Button of the window lifter on
the passenger side
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the front windows - Variant 1 or
the front and rear windows - Variant 2 can be operated by pushing/pulling the
door buttons in the driver’s door » Fig. 51.
The window in the front passenger door and the windows in the rear doors
(variant 2) are operated via the button in each door.
Power window buttons » Fig. 51
Left front door
Right front door
Left rear door
A
B
C
Right rear door
Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats)
Opening/closing windows
To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win-
dow has moved into the desired position.
To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold
until the window has moved into the desired position.
The driver's window can be automatically opened & closed fully by pushing or
pulling the button up to the stop. Renewed pushing/pulling of the button cau-
ses the window to stop immediately.
Deactivating/activating buttons in the rear doors
To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the
E
button. If
the buttons are deactivated, the warning light
lights up in button
E
.
Force limiter
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
WARNING
The front passenger window with the electric window has no force limiter.
The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of injury!
D
E
59
Unlocking and opening
Operational faults
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism
to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the
window again as soon as the operating mechanism has cooled down.
After disconnecting the vehicle battery, automatic opening/closing of the win-
dow can be deactivated. In this case, the system must be activated as follows.
Activating window operation
Switch on the ignition.
Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
Release the button.
Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Lights and visibility
Light
Introduction
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched on.
For the basic position of the light switch, use position .
Note
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is on, the light-emit-
ting surface demists after a short time.
Operating the lights
Fig. 53
Light switch and control dial for
headlight range adjustment
Toswitch the lights on/off,turn the
A
» Fig. 53 switch to one of the following
positions (equipment-dependent).
Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
Switching the light on/off automatically » page 62
Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 64
Switch on low beam
Depending on the vehicle load, adjust the headlight range by turning the con-
troller
B
» Fig. 53 to the following positions.
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded

60
Operation
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions - other-
wise risk of accident.
The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
cles.
The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Note
If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. Does not apply to
the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME
function . The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed
(for vehicles with the KESSY system, after opening the driver's door).
If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running light (hereinafter referred to as "function") lights the
front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are
met.
The light switch is in the position
or

.
The ignition is switched on.
The function is activated.
Activating/deactivating function on vehicles with Infotainment
The function can be deactivated/activated in the Infotainment system in menu

Light
.
Deactivating on vehicles without Infotainment
Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator/main beam lever towards the steering
wheel, push down and hold in this position.
Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible
signal (about 3 s) can be heard.
Activating on vehicles without Infotainment
Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator/main beam lever towards the steering
wheel, push up and hold in this position.
Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible
signal (about 3 s) can be heard.
WARNING
Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor.
Turn signal/main beam
Fig. 54
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
Control stalk positions » Fig. 54
Switch on right turn signal
Switch on left turn signal
Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position)
Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
position)
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
The headlight flasher can be used even if the ignition is switched off.
The turn signal switches off automatically, depending on the steering angle af-
ter completing the turn.
Comfort flashing
When the operating lever is pressed lightly up or down, the indicator in ques-
tion flashes three times.
If, during the comfort signalling, the control stalk is pressed in the opposite di-
rection, the indicating will stop.
Comfort flashing can be activated / deactivated in the Infotainment menu

Light
.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.

61
Lights and visibility
Automatic driving light control
Fig. 55
Light switch: position 
The light switch is in position » Fig. 55 then depending on the equipment
the automatic switch on / off the lights corresponding to the light or weather
conditions (rain) takes place.
If the light switch is in position

, the lettering

illuminates next to the
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol
also illumi-
nates next to the light switch.
Automatic driving light control in the rain (referred to as function in the
following)
The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The function is activated.
The light switch is in the position

.
The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
Setting, activation/deactivation
The following functions can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment
menu

Light
.
Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions
for automatic driving light control
Automatic driving light control during rain
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control (position ) only acts as a support
and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light
and, if necessary, to switch on the lights depending on the prevailing light
conditions.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor -
this can disrupt the function of the system.
Headlight assist (Light Assist)
Fig. 56
Installation location of the sensor / system on/off
The system automatically switches the high beam on/off in accordance with
the existing traffic (other vehicles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving
through a lit village).
The main beam on/off is controlled by a sensor or » Fig. 56.
Activating / Deactivating the system takes place in the Infotainment menu

Light
Light Assist
.
Conditions for the system function
The system is activated.
The light switch is in the position

.
The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h or for some countries over 40 km/h.
The windscreen is clean in the sensor area.
Switch on the system
Push the lever into the sprung position
A
» Fig. 56. The following indicator
light
lights up in the instrument cluster display.
Switch off the system
If the high beam is switched on automatically, move the lever into the sprung
position
B
. The warning light goes out. The high beam turns off.
62
Operation
If the high beam is is not switched on automatically, move the lever into the
sprung position
A
. The warning light goes out. The high beam turns on.
The high beam switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h
(but the system remains switched on).
If there is a system fault, an error message will appear in the instrument clus-
ter display. Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
The system is used only for support, thus the driver is not released from his
obligation to manually adjust the main or low beam according to the given
ambient conditions (e.g. in unfavourable lighting and weather conditions, as
when passing poorly lit road users, if necessary, when the area in front of
the sensor is covered by an obstacle).
CAUTION
Do not cover the sensor and keep the front screen clean - system functionality
can be impaired.
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fig. 57
Light switch – switch on front
and rear fog light
Switching on the fog lights / rear fog lights is possible if the following con-
ditions apply.
The lights switch is in position, or » Fig. 57.
To switch on the fog lights, turn the light switch to position
1
; the warning
light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
To switch on the rear fog light, pull the light switch to position
2
, the indi-
cator light will light up in the instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by
pulling out the light switch to the only possible setting.
The fog lights/rear fog light are switched off in the reverse order.
Note
If an accessory is connected to the trailer socket, the rear fog lamp does not
light up on the vehicle.
Fog lights with CORNER function
The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering or steering), if the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are severely locked (in
the event of conflict between the two versions, the turn signal has the
higher priority).
The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
switch is in the position .
The two functions can be activated/deactivated and adjusted in the Infotain-
ment menu

Light
.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in
the holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor
- this can disrupt the function of the system.
If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
63
Lights and visibility
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 58
Button for hazard warning light
system
Toswitch on/off, press the button » Fig. 58.
When first switched on, the turn signal lights and the warning light
buttons
all flash at the same time as the warning lights
in the instrument cluster.
The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switch-
ed off.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn signal is switched on, the
hazard warning light system is switched off temporarily and only the turn sig-
nal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle (applies with active comfort
flashing).
Parking light
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
Switching on the side light on one side
Switch off the ignition.
Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops» Fig. 54
on page 61.
The parking light is turned on on the relevant side of the vehicle.
Switching on the side light on both sides
Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position » page 60.
Switch off the ignition and lock the vehicle.
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au-
dible warning is turned off.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically.
Driving abroad
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, it is neces-
sary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage.
Interior lighting
Introduction
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
off (or after a door is opened),the lights will automatically switch off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
Front interior lights
Fig. 59
Operation of the front lights: Variant 1/Variant 2
64
Operation
Positions of the sliding light switch
A
» Fig. 59
Switch on
Switch off
Automatic operation
Switch on/off (by pressing the relevant switch
B
) » Fig. 59
Reading lamp left
Reading lamp right
Automatic operation – position
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is unlocked.
One of the doors is opened.
The ignition key is removed.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is locked.
The ignition is switched on.
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
Rear interior lights
Fig. 60
Interior lights at the rear
Operation (by pressing the switch) » Fig. 60
Switching on and off
The rear light is operated automatically with the front light.
When the front interior lighting is switched on, the rear interior lighting also
turns on automatically.
When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior lighting can
be turned on/off as required.
A
Front LED interior light
Depending on the equipment, the LED lighting illuminates the storage com-
partments in the centre console, in the doors and in the footwell.
The lighting is switched on automatically after opening the door; switching
off occurs automatically after the locking of the vehicle or 30 seconds after
closing the door.
The brightness level of the lighting when the low beam or parking lights are
switched on can be adjusted in the Infotainment menu

Ambient light-
ing
.
Visibility
Introduction
WARNING
No objects should be attached to the sun visor that could restrict the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or in a collision.
Windscreen and rear window
Fig. 61
Buttons for the windscreen and
rear window heating
Read and observe on page 65 first.
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the windscreen / rear win-
dow.
The heating only works when the engine is running.
65
Lights and visibility
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 61
Switching the windscreen heater on/off
Switch on/off the rear window heating
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.
The heating automatically switches off after ten minutes.
Note
If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
» page 202, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the ve-
hicle battery.
If the light is flashing inside the button, there is no heating because the bat-
tery charge is too low.
Front sun visors
Fig. 62
Fold down visor/flip up visor/make-up mirror
Read and observe on page 65 first.
Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 62
Swivel cover towards the windscreen
Swivel cover towards the door
Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of
the arrow)
1
2
A
Windscreen wipers and washers
Introduction
The windshield wipers and the windshield washer system only operate if the
ignition is switched on.
WARNING
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
CAUTION
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 219.
In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.
Carefully separate frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen and
free from snow and ice.
Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is a risk of damage to the
windscreen by the windscreen wiper arms.
Do not switch on the ignition when the wiper arm is raised from the wind-
screen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet by the wiper arms.
Note
Depending on vehicle equipment, the windscreen washer jets can be heated
automatically after starting the engine.
66
Operation
Front wipers and washers
Fig. 63
Operating the front windscreen
wipers and washer system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
High-speed wiping
Slow-speed wiping
Depending on equipment fitted:
Intermittent wiping
Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain
Wipers and washers off
Single wipe of the windscreen (spring-loaded position)
Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position

– by setting the
switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
often
Spraying and wiping the disc (spring-loaded position) - after releasing the
operating lever the wipers continue for another 1 to 3 strokes
Automatic windscreen wiping during rain can be activated/deactivated in
the Infotainment menu

Mirrors and wipers
.
WARNING
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is not released
from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers man-
ually depending on the visibility conditions.




A
Rear wipers and washer/Reversing camera cleaning system
Fig. 64
Operating the windscreen wip-
ers and washing system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the
control stalk, the wipers perform another 1 to 3 wiper strokes
Spraying the rear view camera (sprung position)
Rear screen wiping
Wipers and washers off
Automatic rear wiper
If, with the front wipers switched on, reverse gear is selected, the automatic
regular intermittent wiping of the rear window is enabled.
This function can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment menu

Mirrors and wipers
or at a specialist garage (depending on the equipment),
Headlight cleaning system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Headlights are cleaned under the following conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
The low beam is switched on.
The outside temperature is about -11° C to +36° C.
The headlights are cleaned after the first and every subsequent tenth spray on
the windscreen. The spray interval can be adjusted by a specialist garage (max-
imum after every twentieth spraying of the windscreen).
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).

67
Lights and visibility
Rear view mirror
Introduction
WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, they make objects ap-
pear smaller and further away. Therefore, use the interior mirror whenever
possible, for assessing the distances to the vehicles following behind.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respira-
tory system.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. If
necessary get medical assistance.
Interior mirror dimming
Fig. 65
Interior mirror: manual dimming/auto-darkening
Read and observe on page 68 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 65
Basic mirror position (not darkened)
Mirror blackout
Mirror with automatic dimming
The mirror dimming » Fig. 65 is automatically controlled after the engine start.
1
2
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
WARNING
Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external de-
vice can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - it could cause an acci-
dent.
The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The
sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror.
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 66
Exterior mirror operation: mechanical / electrical
Read and observe on page 68 first.
The outer mirror surfaces are (depending on the vehicle specification) me-
chanically or electrically adjustable.
To adjust the mirror surface, move the knob in the direction of arrows
» Fig. 66.
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by carefully pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
The knob for the electrically adjustable mirrors can be moved to the following
positions » Fig. 66 - .
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror
Switch off mirror control
68
Operation
Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror
Exterior mirror heater (only operates when the engine is running)
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window. To put it back
into its original position, it should be folded back from the side window until it
audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
Do not toucsh the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.
Seats and head restraints
Front seats
Introduction
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – otherwise
risk of accident!
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
Adjusting the front seats
Fig. 67
Control elements on the seat
Read and observe on page 69 first.
Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control
lever must lock audibly)
Adjusting height of seat
Adjust the tilt of the backrest (when adjusting the backrest take off any
pressure, and select the required tilt using your back)
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
A
B
C
69
Seats and head restraints
Armrest setting
Fig. 68
Adjusting the armrest
Read and observe on page 69 first.
To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow
A
into one
of the locking positions » Fig. 68.
To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow
A
past the stop and then
fold down again.
Rear seats
Seat backrests
Fig. 69
Fold seat backrest forwards / standby position of the seat belt
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the seat backrests. If neces-
sary, remove the rear head restraints » page 71.
Folding forward
Push the head rest into the seat backrest until it clicks into position.
Insert the belt buckle latching element
C
of the seat belt into the opening
on the side panel - ready position » Fig. 69.
Push the release lever
B
in the direction of arrow
1
and fold down the seat
backrest in the direction of arrow
2
.
In the undivided back seat, insert the buckle tongues
C
into the two outer
belts and the press the release handles
A
on both sides of the seat back si-
multaneously.
Folding backwards
Pull the seat belt
C
for the side panel in the direction of arrow
3
» Fig. 69.
Raise the seat backrest against the direction of arrow
2
until the release
handle
A
audibly locks. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest.
Make sure that the red pin
B
is hidden.
In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. After
folding back the seat back, the release handles
A
should audibly click into
place on both sides of the seat back and the red mark
B
should not be visible
on either side of the seat back.
WARNING
The seat backs in occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on
sudden braking – risk of injury.
CAUTION
When moving the seat backrest, the seat belts should not be trapped - there is
a risk of damage to the seat belts.
70
Operation
Fold down armrest
Fig. 70
Fold down armrest
The armrest can be folded down by pulling on the loop
A
in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 70.
Headrests
Introduction
Note
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can-
not be adjusted in height.
Adjusting the height
Fig. 71
Setting the height of the headrest
Adjustment of the head rest heights is the same in the front and rear.
Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 71.
To move the headrest down, press the securing button
A
in the direction of
arrow
2
and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of ar-
row
3
.
CAUTION
If the tablet holder adapter is secured to the guide rods of the front headrests
» page 80, do not push the headrests down to the stop – risk of damaging the
headrests.
Removing/inserting the front headrests
Fig. 72
Removing/inserting the front headrest
To remove, hold the locking button
A
in the direction of arrow
1
and re-
move the headrest in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 72.
To insert, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow
3
until the locking button clicks into place.
Removing/inserting the rear headrests
Fig. 73 Removing/inserting the rear headrest
71
Seats and head restraints
To remove, hold the locking button
A
in the direction of arrow
1
, and at
the same time, use a flat screwdriver (with a max. width of 5 mm) to push
the locking button in the opening
B
in the direction of arrow
2
and remove
the headrest in the direction of arrow
3
» Fig. 73.
To insert, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow
4
until the locking button clicks into place.
Seat heaters
Fig. 74 Buttons for heating the front seats/rear seats
The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats can
be heated electrically.
Seat heating buttons » Fig. 74
Left seat heating
Right seat heating
To turn on the heater at maximum heat (level 2), press button
or
.
By repeatedly pressing the button, the heat is turned down until it is complete-
ly switched off. The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illu-
minated warning lights in the switch.
The seat heating only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
If you are sensitive to pain and/or temperature, e.g. through medication, pa-
ralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to
use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to make
regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the body
can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor,
who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
Do not switch on the heating for unoccupied seats.
Do not switch on the heating for seats which have objects on them (e.g. a
child seat, bag or similar).
Do not switch on the heating for seats which have seat covers or protective
covers on them.
Note
If the heaters for the rear seats are set to their highest intensity (level 2),
they are automatically switched down to level 1 after 10 minutes.
If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatical-
ly » page 202, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the
vehicle battery.
72
Operation
Useful features
Passenger compartment features
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
they could cause an accident!
Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat, except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments should be closed
while driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened lid or through the
loose objects in the compartment.
Make sure no objects protrude from the storage compartments - danger
of injury!
Do not exceed the permissible loads for the storage compartments and
pockets - risk of injury and risk of damage to the compartments and pock-
ets!
Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like should only be stored in the ashtray -
danger of fire/burns!
The storage compartments, multimedia holder and waste container are
not a substitute for the ashtray and must not be used for such purposes –
risk of fire!
CAUTION
Do not place any large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and
pockets - there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
Ticket holder
Fig. 75
Ticket holder
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The ticket holder is provided for the attachment of e.g. parking tickets.
Storage compartments in the doors
Fig. 76
Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
Storage compartments » Fig. 76
Storage compartment
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
WARNING
Storage compartment
A
» Fig. 76 is to be used exclusively for storing ob-
jects which do not stick out – danger of restricting the effectiveness of the
side airbags.
A
B
C
73
Useful features
Storage compartments in centre console
Fig. 77 Non-lockable compartment, front / rear
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The non-lockable storage compartment is located in the front centre console
A
and in the rear centre console
B
» Fig. 77.
USB and AUX inputs
Fig. 78
Front USB and AUX input/rear USB inputs
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The USB and AUX inputs are located above the storage compartment at the
front of the centre console » Fig. 78.
The USB inputs (marked with
) are also located in the rear centre console, de-
pending on the equipment.
The USB input in the front centre console can be used for charging and for da-
ta transmission. The USB inputs in the rear centre console can be used only for
charging.
Information for using » page 118, USB input and » page 119, AUX input.
Storage compartment in the dashboard
Fig. 79
Storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment is located in the middle part of the panel » Fig. 79.
Cup holders
Fig. 80
Cup holder at the front/rear
74
Operation
Fig. 81
Cup holder in rear armrest
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The cup holders are located in the front centre console
A
, the rear centre
console
B
» Fig. 80 and in the rear armrest
C
» Fig. 81.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
WARNING
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
Waste container
Fig. 82
Waste container: inserting and moving/opening
Fig. 83 Replacing bags
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
Insert waste container
Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 82.
Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow
B
.
Remove the waste container
Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow
A
» Fig. 82.
Open/close waste container
Lift the lid in the direction of arrow
C
» Fig. 82.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
Remove the waste container from the slot.
Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 83.
Pull the bag together with the frame down in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bag from the frame.
Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow
3
.
Place the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow
4
into the container
body, so that the two lugs engage audibly on the frame.
Note
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.
75
Useful features
Multimedia holder
Fig. 84
Multimedia holder
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
Multimedia holder » Fig. 84
Storage compartment for storing two coins
Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
Storage compartment in the front armrest
Fig. 85 Storage compartment / open storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
To open the armrest in the area
A
, grasp and lift the lid » Fig. 85.
To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
A
B
C
Glasses storage box
Fig. 86
Opening the glasses storage box
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
To open, press on the lid of the glasses compartment in area
A
. The com-
partment folds in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 86.
To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it
audibly clicks into place.
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.
76
Operation
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 87 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and
open air supply
Read and observe
and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated
when the storage compartment is opened), a bottle holder which can take
contents of max. 1 l as well as an air outlet.
Storage compartment
To open, pull the handle
A
in the direction of arrow
1
and fold the cover in
the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 87.
To close, swivel the cover in the direction of arrow
3
until it audibly clicks
into place.
Air supply
To open, turn the dial in the direction of arrow
B
until it stops » Fig. 87.
To close, turn the dial against the direction of arrow
B
until it stops.
The temperature of the storage compartment supplied with air is dependent
on the setting in the air conditioning.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 3 kg.
Storage compartment for an umbrella
Fig. 88
Storage compartment for um-
brella
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment under the passenger seat » Fig. 88 is used for stor-
ing an umbrella.
Clothes hook
Fig. 89
Clothes hooks
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 89.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.
77
Useful features
WARNING
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
of clothing hung up - danger of injury.
Do not use hangers to hang up the clothes - there is a risk of restricting
the effectiveness of head airbags and a danger of injury from the hanger.
Make sure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impede your
vision.
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats
Fig. 90
Map pockets
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The map pockets are intended for storage of maps, magazines, etc.
Storage pockets on the inner sides of the front seats
Fig. 91
Storage pocket
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage pockets are located on the inside of the front seats » Fig. 91 and
are used to store small and light objects (e.g. mobile phones).
The maximum permissible load of each of the pockets is 150 g.
Electrical sockets
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
they could cause an accident!
Stow all devices safely during the journey to prevent them from being
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – risk of death!
The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire!
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
The 12-volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving
the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts - otherwise the
electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.
78
Operation
12-volt socket
Fig. 92 12-volt socket cover: in the front centre console/in the luggage
compartment
Read and observe
and on page 78 first.
To use, remove the cover from the socket » Fig. 92 -
or open the cover of
the socket » Fig. 92 -
.
Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Introduction
The ashtray can be used for disposing of ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like.
WARNING
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Ashtray
Fig. 93 Removing the front/rear ashtray
Fig. 94
Opening/disassembling the ash-
tray
Read and observe on page 79 first.
Removable ashtray
Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 93. Insertion
takes place in reverse order.
To open the ashtray, turn the top part of the cover in the direction of arrow
B
» Fig. 94. Closing takes place in reverse order.
To disassemble turn the entire cover in the direction
1
until it stops and re-
move in direction of arrow
2
. Assembly takes place in reverse order.
79
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 95
Cigarette lighter
Read and observe on page 79 first.
To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing
lighter clicks out again » Fig. 95.
Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the sock-
et.
WARNING
The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burning, fire or
damage to the vehicle interior.
Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - can cause burns.
Note
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
Tablet holder
Introduction
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone, etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and
max. 195 mm can be secured in the support.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
Attaching the rear headrests
Fig. 96 Inserting: adapter/holder
Fig. 97
Removing: holder/adapter
Read and observe on page 80 first.
To insert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
and clip in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 96 » .
Clip the holder in the direction of arrow
2
into the adapter.
To remove, pull on the securing tab
A
in direction of arrow
3
and take the
holder out of the adapter in the direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 97.
Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow
5
from the
guide rods of the headrest.
WARNING
Be careful with the adapter – otherwise there is a risk of finger injury.
80
Operation
Handle holder
Fig. 98 Tilt and rotate holder
Fig. 99
Adjust holder size
Read and observe on page 80 first.
The holder may be tilted by 30° in the direction of the arrow
1
and turned by
360° in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 98.
To
adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A
in the direction of ar-
row
3
and push the part
B
in the direction of arrow
4
to the desired posi-
tion » Fig. 99.
Note
If there is no external device in the holder, then we recommend that the part
B
is moved down fully. Otherwise, irritating noises may occur at certain
speeds.
Transport of cargo
Luggage compartment and transporting objects
Introduction
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to
the shift in centre-of-gravity. Therefore, adjust the speed and driving mode ac-
cordingly.
When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or fixing nets so that they cannot
slip.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
Tyre pressure is to match the load.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will go out auto-
matically after 10 minutes.
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
An unsecured dirt or improperly attached load could slip during a sudden
manoeuvre or in an accident - danger of injury!
Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death!
When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats .
81
Transport of cargo
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged.
Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of abrasive objects.
Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the lug-
gage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the com-
partments.
Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
Fastening elements
Fig. 100
Fasteners
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.
Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 100
Lashing eyes for securing cargo, fastening nets and multifunction pocket
Fastener for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
Lashing eye for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
The upper front lashing eye
C
is located behind the folding rear seat backrest.
The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes is
A
is 350 kg.
A
B
C
Fixing nets
Fig. 101 Fastening examples for nets
Fig. 102
Fastening vertical pocket
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 101 and » Fig. 102
Horizontal pocket
Floor net
Vertical pocket
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
A
B
C
82
Operation
Multifunction pocket
Fig. 103
Securing the multifunction
pocket
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The pocket » Fig. 103 can be secured to the fastening elements
A
,
B
and
C
» Fig. 100 on page 82.
The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to the fastening element
is 3 kg.
Hooks
Fig. 104
Hooks
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
A hook for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., is provided on
each side of the luggage compartment» Fig. 104.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
Floor covering on both sides
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment. One
side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet
or dirty items).
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 105
Remove the luggage compartment cover
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
If the support straps
A
» Fig. 105 are attached to the boot lid, then opening
the lid will raise the boot lid cover (hereafter referred to as cover).
The cover may be removed from the vehicle or stored behind the rear seat
backs in the “park position” » Fig. 106 on page 84.
The maximum permissible load of the cover is 1 kg.
Removing
On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 105.
Hold the raised cover and press on the two sides on the underside of the
cover in the area of the recess
C
.
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Installing
Place the fixtures
B
on the cover above the brackets
C
on the side trim
» Fig. 105.
83
Transport of cargo
Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the
mounts
C
. The fixtures
B
must lock into place in the mounts
C
on both
sides of the luggage compartment.
Unhook the straps
A
on both sides of the boot lid.
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - risk of injury if brak-
ing suddenly or colliding!
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to avoid canting and the subsequent
damage to the cover or the side trim.
The cover must be inserted properly and the load must not exceed the
height of the cover.
The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com-
partment lid when it is in the raised position.
There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position
and the rear backrest.
“Parking position” of the boot cover
Fig. 106
Luggage compartment cover
stowed behind the rear seats
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The luggage compartment cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
Slide the dismantled cover between the rear seat backrest and the bolt
A
» Fig. 106.
WARNING
The luggage compartment cover in the “parking position” restricts the driv-
er's view at the back.
Storage compartments in the luggage compartment
Fig. 107 Remove the tray cover on the left / right
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The storage compartments with removable covers are designed for storing
small objects of up to 1.5 kg. in weight in total.
To remove, grasp the top part of the cover and remove in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 107.
CAUTION
When handling the storage compartment cover, ensure that it and/or the lug-
gage compartment trim is not damaged.
84
Operation
Cargo elements
Fig. 108 Removing cargo elements / example on how to mount the load
by means of the cargo element
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The cargo elements are designed for mounting and securing loads with a maxi-
mum gross weight of 8 kg.
Before use, remove the Cargo elements in the direction of the arrows
» Fig. 108 - .
Use the cargo elements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear
seats » Fig. 108
.
After use, stow the Cargoelements in their original position.
Class N1 vehicles
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the
load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.
Transportation on the roof rack
Fig. 109 Attachment points
The attachment points
A
and
B
are located on both sides of the vehicle
» Fig. 109.
Mounting and dismounting of the roof bars is carried out according to the in-
structions provided.
Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 75 kg.
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed to aid road safety when trans-
porting cargo on the roof rack.
Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly
with suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstance – risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported.
85
Transport of cargo
Note
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Heating and ventilation
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
Introduction
The heater heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning sys-
tem also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system works under the following conditions.
The cooling system is switched on.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is above 2 °C.
The blower is switched on.
When the cooling system is switched on, it prevents misting of the windscreen
and windows.
It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly acti-
vating the air recirculation system» page 88.
Health protection
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
The difference between the outside temperature and the inside temperature
should not be greater than 5 °C.
The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner is to be carried out by a spe-
cialist company.
WARNING
The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there is a risk of accident.
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
86
Operation
Note
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
ensure that the engine cools down.
Heating and manual air conditioning
Fig. 110
Controls of the heating / air conditioning
Read and observe on page 86 first.
Individual functions can be adjusted or switched on by turning the dial or
pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 110. When the function is activated, a
warning light illuminates in the button.
Setting temperature
Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Set the blower speed (Level 0: Blower off, level 4: highest speed)
Set the direction of the air outlet » page 89
Air flow to the windows
Air flow to the upper body
Air flow in the footwell
Air flow to the windows and the footwell
Switch recirculation on/off » page 88
Switch the cooling system on/off
A
B
C

Information on the cooling system
After pressing the buttonthe indicator light on the button lights up, even if
not all the conditions for the cooling system have been met. The cooling sys-
tem starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met
» page 86.
Note
To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air condi-
tioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstan-
ces.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 111
Controls the Climatronic
Read and observe on page 86 first.
Individual functions can be adjusted or switched on by turning the dial or
pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 111.
Setting temperature
Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Selected temperature
Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit
Automatic operation of the air conditioning system is switched on
Intensive air flow to the windscreen switched on
Direction of air flow
Recirculated air mode activated
Cooling system activated
Set blower speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
87
Heating and ventilation
Set the blower speed (the set blower speed is indicated by the corre-
sponding number of segments in the display)
Turn to the left: Decrease speed / switch off Climatronic
Turn to the right: Increase speed
Interior temperature sensor
Switching on/off the intensive windscreen air flow - when this function
is switched on, the warning light illuminates in the button
Switching automatic mode on » page 88
Switching the airflow to the windows on and off
Switching the airflow to the upper body on and off
Switching the airflow to the footwell on and off
Switch recirculation on/off » page 88
Switch the cooling system on/off
When this function is switched on, the corresponding icon appears in the dis-
play.
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation function remains
active, whereby the lowest temperature that can be reached is the outside
temperature.
Setting temperature
In the range between 16 ° C and 29 ° C, an automatic temperature control
takes place.
At a temperature setting below 16 ° C,

lights up in the display, the Clima-
tronic functions with maximum cooling performance.
At a temperature setting above 29 ° C,

lights up in the temperature display,
the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit
Press the and  buttons simultaneously and hold for about 2 s, the dis-
play shows the desired unit (position
3
» Fig. 111).
CAUTION
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor
11
» Fig. 111 – the function of the
Climatronic could be affected.
Note
In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in en-
gine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
10
11


Climatronic - automatic operation
Read and observe on page 86 first.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
To switch on press the  button. The display shows  (pos.
4
» Fig. 111
on page 87).
To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
speed. The temperature regulation is continued.
Air distribution control
Read and observe on page 86 first.
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the In-
terior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
To switch on/off, press the
button.
Heating and manual air conditioning system
If the air distribution control is set to position
when the recirculation modes
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. By pressing the
button, the air recirculation also in this position can be switched on again.
Climatronic
With the recirculated-air mode switched on the symbol
appears in the dis-
play.
The symbol
disappears from the display after turning off the air recircula-
tion.
If the humidity increases in the vehicle, an automatic shutdown of the recircu-
lation can occur.
WARNING
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time,
because no fresh air is fed through from the outside. “Stale air” may result
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as windows mist up, turn on the re-
circulation system immediately - risk of accident!
88
Operation
CAUTION
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air opera-
tion is switched on. The smoke sucked from the interior is deposited on the
evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through con-
siderable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Note
If recirculated air mode is switched on for around 15 minutes, the symbol
will begin to flash in the Climatronic display as a sign that the recirculated air
mode is switched on long-term. If the recirculated air mode is not switched
off, the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 112 Air outlet vents
Read and observe on page 86 first.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4
» Fig. 112, the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
The airflow direction is set by moving the adjustment element
A
» Fig. 112 in
the desired direction.
Open/close
Turn the regulator
B
upwards/downwards » Fig. 112.
Depending on the setting for air distribution, the air will flow from the follow-
ing air vents.
Set the direction of the air
outlet
Air outlet vents » Fig. 112
 1. 2. 4
1. 2. 4. 5
3. 4
4. 5
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
89
Heating and ventilation
Infotainment
Introductory information
Important information
Introduction to the subject
WARNING
Only use Infotainment in such a way that you have control of the vehicle
in every traffic situation (e.g. do not write text messages while driving, do
not link or connect the telephone, do not work with the contact list, do not
enter any destinations, do not connect WLAN or SmartLink etc.) – Other-
wise there is a risk of an accident!
Always route the connection cable of the external device such that is
does not restrict you when driving.
WARNING
Adjust the volume to ensure that acoustic signals from outside the vehi-
cle, e.g. the police, ambulances and fire engines, can be heard at all times.
High volumes can cause hearing damage.
CAUTION
In some countries, some Infotainment functions can no longer be selected
when the vehicle is running faster than a certain speed. This is not a malfunc-
tion, but complies with the national legal regulations.
Mobile devices and applications
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 113
QR code with reference to web
pages for checking the compati-
bility of devices
The availability of some of the functions described in this Owner's Manual
depends on the type of device to be connected and the applications instal-
led in it.
Compatibility
On the ŠKODA pages, check to see if Infotainment is compatible with the se-
lected mobile devices. This verification is carried out by reading the QR code
» Fig. 113 or after typing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Applications
Applications can be installed in external devices (e.g. mobile, tablet) making it
possible to display additional information on the Infotainment screen or to op-
erate Infotainment.
Due to the variety of applications as well as their ongoing development, the
available applications may not work in all external devices. ŠKODA AUTO can
accept no liability for their proper function.
The range of available applications and their functionality is dependent on the
Infotainment model, vehicle and region.
Infotainment overview
Description – Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 114 Infotainment Amundsen
90
Infotainment
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 111

- Media menu » page 115

- Telephone menu » page 125

- Voice control » page 97

- Navigation menu » page 139

- Target-oriented traffic information » page 154

- Vehicle system settings » page 156

- Overview of Infotainment menus » page 95
Touchscreen » page 92
Description – Infotainment Swing
Fig. 115
Infotainment Swing
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

Radio menu » page 111

- Media menu » page 115
Depending on equipment fitted:

- Telephone menu » page 125

- Muting

- Infotainment settings » page 106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Depending on equipment fitted:

- Menu SmartLink (Press)/turn on/off the voice control function
SmartLink (hold) » page 134

- Sound settings » page 106

- Vehicle system settings » page 156
Touchscreen » page 92
SD card slot » page 118
Description – Infotainment Blues
Fig. 116
Infotainment Blues
Dial (hereinafter only symbol
)
Display
SD card slot
Switches Infotainment on/off
Radio menu » page 111 / Select radio frequency range
Media menu » page 115 / Select audio source
Settings of the selected menu (Radio » page 110 /Media » page 110)
Infotainment settings » page 109
Sound settings » page 109
Backward / forward movement / settings of the selected menu item
values
Function keys (each of the functions for these keys is described in the
relevant chapters)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3





/
-
91
Introductory information
External module
Does not apply to Infotainment Swing, Blues.
Fig. 117
Example of an external module
(Infotainment Amundsen)
Depending on the vehicle configuration and infotainment type, all the follow-
ing elements must not be included in the external module.
The external module is located in the storage compartment on the front pas-
senger side » Fig. 117.
SD1 card slot
SD2 card slot
Touch screen
The Infotainment can be operated by lightly touching the screen with your
fingers.
The brightness level of the screen can be set by » page 100 or » page 106.
To protect the screen, a suitable protective film for touch screens can be used.
The screen can be cleaned with a soft cloth and pure spirit if necessary.
1
2
Infotainment operation
Infotainment operation
Screen areas
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 118
Screen areas
Description of the display » Fig. 118
Status line with time and outdoor temperature data and other information
Information and operation of the current menu
Function surfaces of the current menu
Operation principles
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 119
Screen display
Description of the display » Fig. 119
Name of the current menu
Return to the higher-level menu
A
B
C
A
B
92
Infotainment
Scroll symbol – you can move in the menu by moving your fingers up or
down on the scroll symbol
Menu item with “checkbox”
- Function is switched on
- Function is switched off
Opens a sub-menu of the menu item with a “pop-up window”
Function surfaces
The screen areas which confirm a function or a menu are called “function sur-
faces”.
White text – the surface is active and thus selectable
Grey text – the surface is inactive and therefore not selectable
Green frame – currently selected surface
Selecting a menu/menu item/function
Drag your finger over the screen in the required direction.
By moving your finger over the scroll bar
By turning the dial
.
Confirming a menu/menu item/function
By tapping on the function surface.
By pressing the dial
.
Returning to higher-level menu
By tapping on the function surface
.
By tapping on the screen outside of the “pop-up window”.
By pressing the corresponding button next to the screen (e.g. in the menu
Media, by pressing the

button).
Selecting a menu item/function value
- Selected menu item/function value
- Deselected menu item/function value
Setting a value
By tapping on the function surface or in the bottom of the screen.
By touching or moving your finger over the scale.
By turning the dial .
Note
Depending on the equipment, the Infotainment can also be operated by means
of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Further information
» page 47.
C
D
E
Operating principles and display areas
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 120
Display
Description of the display » Fig. 120
Total number of menu items for each setting
Position of the current menu item
Name of the current menu item
Go to previous menu item value
Go to next menu item value
Current menu item value
Setting a value
The desired value of the selected item will be set to one of the following ways.
By pressing button
or
.
By turning the dial
.
Exit setting
To exit setting, press one of the buttons
-
.
If the device is not being operated, the display switches off after a few sec-
onds in the last selected mode of (Radio or Media).
A
B
C
D
E
F
93
Infotainment operation
Operating the menus
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 121 Operating the menus
Operating the menus » Fig. 121
Browsing the menu, list entries
Expand/reduce the menu window
Expand/reduce the menu window (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Open/close the menu window (does not apply to Infotainment Swing)
Close the menu window
Alphanumeric keyboard
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 122
Example of the keyboard display
The alphanumeric keyboard is used to enter letters, numbers and characters.
A
B
C
D
Description of the alphanumeric keyboard » Fig. 122
Input line
Context-dependent:
- Switch from upper case to lower case and vice versa
 - Switch to special characters
 - Switch to numbers
Context-dependent:
 - Switch to numbers
 - Switch to Latin letters
- Switch to Cyrillic letters
- Display of visited entries (the number of visited entries is displayed in the
function surface)
Erase the entered characters
Hold to display the variants of the respective letters.
Switch between keyboards with specific characters of the selected
languages » page 101 or » page 107
Space
Move the cursor within the input line to the left
Move the cursor within the input line to the right
Confirmation of the entered characters
Search
While entering characters, a search is made for corresponding entries.
The entry to be searched for (such as a telephone contact) must be entered
along with any special characters (diacritics).
By tapping on the function surface a list of matching entries opens.
Switching Infotainment on/off
To switch Infotainment on/off, press
.
Automatic switch-on of Infotainment
If Infotainment was not switched off with
before the ignition was switched
off, it will automatically switch on when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment
If the vehicle key is pulled out of the ignition lock while Infotainment is switch-
ed on, Infotainment will switch off automatically.
A
B
C

94
Infotainment
If the vehicle is fitted with the starter button, Infotainment will switch off au-
tomatically after the engine is switched off and the door is opened.
With the ignition off, Infotainment will automatically switch off after about 30
minutes.
Infotainment switches off automatically under certain circumstances. Infotain-
ment informs you of this via a text message on the Infotainment display.
Infotainment restart
If Infotainment stops responding (if it “freezes”), it can be restarted by press-
ing and holding
for longer than 10 s (does not apply to Infotainment Blues).
Show time and date on the screen
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
You can display the time and date on the Infotainment screen in standby mode
and in "Screen off" mode.
Standby mode
With the ignition on and infotainment off (Standbymode), it is possible to dis-
play the time and date on the Infotainment screen.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
The display mode can be changed by moving your finger sideways across the
screen (does not apply to Infotainment Swing).
"Screen off" mode
With the ignition on and functions
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
and
Display clock
when screen is off
» page 100 enabled, it is possible to display the time and date
when the Infotainment screen is switched off.
The display type depends on the display mode selected in standby mode (does
not apply to the Infotainment Swing).
Adjusting the volume
Every change in volume is displayed on the screen.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Swing
To increase the volume, turn the controller
clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn the controller
anticlockwise.
To mute, turn the controller
anticlockwise to 0.
or: To activate/deactivate the mute setting, press the

button (applies
to Infotainment Swing).
Applies to Infotainment Blues
To increase the volume, turn the control switch
1
» Fig. 116 on page 91
clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn the control switch
1
anticlockwise.
To mute, turn the controller
1
anticlockwise to 0.
The following symbol appears on the screen when the sound is muted .
If playback was coming from a source in the Media menu at the time of mut-
ing, then playback will be stopped (not applicable to AUX).
CAUTION
High volumes can cause sound resonance in the vehicle.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
Infotainment menus
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 123
Overview of infotainment me-
nus: grid display
95
Infotainment operation
Fig. 124
Overview infotainment menus:
horizontal display
To display the overview of Infotainment menus, press the

button.
To set the display mode, press the button

, then tap the function surface
Screen
Menu:
.
Select the
Grid display
» Fig. 123 or
Horizont. Display
» Fig. 124 option.
Overview of Infotainment menus
Radio menu » page 111
Media menu » page 115
ŠKODA Connect Online Services » page 12
SmartLink menu » page 134
With a connection established to an external device,
the actual connec-
tion is shown instead of a symbol
Android Auto
» page 135
-
Apple CarPlay
» page 136
-
MirrorLink®
» page 136
Telephone menu » page 125
Vehicle system settings » page 156
Navigation menu » page 139 (Applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
List of traffic reports (TMC) (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
» page 154
Media Command menu (Applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 123
Images menu » page 122
Sound settings » page 100
Infotainment settings » page 100
Configuration wizard
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if there are at least two
non-selected menu items after turning on the Infotainment.
For manual display in Infotainment Amundsen, press the

button, then
tap on the function surface
Configuration wizard
.
For manual display in Infotainment Swing, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Configuration wizard
.
The Configuration wizard allows you to set the following menu items in se-
quence.
Time and date format
Storing the radio station with the strongest reception signal at present
Pairing and connecting a telephone to the Infotainment system
Home address (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Setting the ŠKODA Connect Online Services
The selected menu item is marked with the
symbol.
Operating using an application in the external device
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Swing.
Some Infotainment functions can be operated using an application in the sup-
ported external device.
For the complete functionality of the application, data transmission from ex-
ternal devices must be activated and, if necessary, operation of the Infotain-
ment via the application must be approved.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
Activate data transfer in Infotainment. To do this, press the

button and
then tap function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data transfer
for ŠKODA Apps
.
Release Infotainment operation using the application. To do this, press the

button and then tap function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Use
apps to operate:
Confirm
/
Allow
.
Connect Infotainment to an external device via WLAN » page 133.
In the external device, launch an application for Infotainment operation (e.g.
ŠKODA Media Command).
96
Infotainment
Operation principle
Fig. 126
Example of screen display
The voice control main menu » Fig. 125 on page 97 contains basic voice com-
mands for the individual menus.
Other voice commands are displayed by tapping the respective function sur-
face, if required, by issuing the name of respective command (e.g. navigation).
The screen shows the following » Fig. 126.
Context-dependent:
The system is waiting for a voice command
The system recognises a voice command
The system plays a message
Voice command entry was stopped
Available list entries
Possible voice commands
Displaying other possible voice commands
Voice commands that can be issued are indicated in “quotation marks”.
Note
Depending on the equipment, the voice control symbols
A
» Fig. 126 are also
displayed on the display of the instrument cluster.
A
B
C
Voice commands
Enter
The voice commands must only be issued when the symbol is displayed
on the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. The in-
put tone can be switched on/off. To do this, press

and then tap on
Voice control
.
It is not necessary to wait for the end of message playback when Infotainment
is playing a message. The Infotainment message can be terminated by pressing
the button

or button on the multifunction steering wheel. Then a voice
command can be issued. Voice control is much faster as a result.
Stop
This allows more time to enter the voice command (e.g. in the list of retrieved
contacts).
The process for entering voice commands can be stopped by moving a finger
up/down across the screen or by turning the controller
.
When stopping, the symbol changes from
to
.
Restore
The procedure for entering voice commands can be restarted in one of the fol-
lowing ways.
By tapping on the function surface
.
By pressing the button

on the Infotainment.
By pressing the button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Not recognising a voice command
If a voice command is not recognised by the Infotainment system three times
in succession, then voice control is stopped.
Correction of a voice command input
A voice command can be corrected, modified or re-entered by pressing the
button

or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. However,
this is only possible as long as the symbol is displayed on the screen.
You do not have to wait until the voice command is recognised by Infotain-
ment.
98
Infotainment
Voice commands can be used during voice control
Voice command Function
Back Return to the previous menu
Help Reproduce and display possible voice commands
Voice commands that can be used while browsing the list entries
Voice command Function
Next page
Browse menu/list/directory
Previous page
First page
Last page
Additional Information
Navigation – applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To enter a destination, you must first issue the command“Enter address” and
then follow the Infotainment instructions.
It is not necessary to spell city and street names if the entered destination is
located in a country that has no voice control available for the language.
Online POI search – applies to Infotainment Amundsen
When Infotainment Online » page 16 services are activated, a POI search can
also be carried out online by issuing the voice command “Find online POI”.
Radio
To enable a radio station to be selected using voice command, the station must
be stored in the list of available stations » page 113 or in the preset list
» page 113.
Updating the Infotainment software
Fig. 127
Available software updates on
the ŠKODA websites
The software update ensures optimum operation of Infotainment (e.g. com-
patibility with new telephones).
Information on Infotainment compatibility can be found on the following
ŠKODA Internet pages. This is done by scanning the QR code » Fig. 127 or en-
tering the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To determine the software version, press the

button then tap the func-
tion surface
System information
.
To start the software update, press the

button, then tap the function
surface
System information
Update software
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To determine the software version, press the

button, then tap the
Sys-
tem information
function surface.
To start the software update, press the

button, then tap the
System in-
formation
Update software
function surface.
99
Infotainment operation
Infotainment settings - Amundsen
Infotainment system settings
Sound settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface .
Volume
- Volume settings
Radio announcements
- Volume adjustment of traffic announcements (TP)
Navigation announcements
- Volume setting for navigation announcements
Voice control
- Volume setting for voice output
Maximum switch-on volume
- Set the maximum volume when switching on In-
fotainment
Speed dependent Speed-dep. vol.adjust.
- Increases the volume as speed increa-
ses
AUX volume
- Sets the volume for the device connected via AUX
Quiet
- Low volume
Medium
- Medium volume
Loud
- High volume
Bluetooth audio:
- Volume adjustment of the external device connected via
the Bluetooth
®
audio profile
Quiet
- Low volume
Medium
- Medium volume
Loud
- High volume
Entertainment fading while parking
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume)
when the parking aid is activated
Entertainment fad. (Navigation)
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) in
the event of a navigation announcement
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Sets the equalizer
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
ŠKODA Surround
- Switch surround sound on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Virtual Subwoofer
-Switch virtual subwoofer on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Touchscreen tone
- Switch audible tone when touching the screen on/off
No navigation announcements during calls
- Switches the navigation prompts on or
off during a telephone conversation
Display settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Screen
.
Menu:
- Setting the infotainment menu display
Horizont. display
- Horizontal display » Fig. 124 on page 96
Grid display
- Grid display » Fig. 123 on page 95
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Display clock when screen is off
- Time and date display when the screen is
switched off
Brightness:
- Screen brightness setting
Touchscreen tone
- Switch audible tone when touching the screen on/off
Animation when finger near screen
- Switch the proximity sensors on/off (when
the function is on the bottom bar with function surfaces will be displayed e.g.
in the main Navigation menu when you move a finger towards the screen)
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Time and date settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Time and date
.
Clock time source:
- Time source settings: manual/GPS (applies to infotainment
Amundsen)
Time:
- Time Settings
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
Automatic summer time
- Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
Time zone
- Sets the time zone
Time Format:
- Sets the time format
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Sets the date format
Infotainment language settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
In some languages, after selecting the function surface,
Female
or
Male
are dis-
played for the choice of Infotainment voice prompts.
100
Infotainment
Note
When a language is selected which does not support voice control, Infotain-
ment will indicate this with a message on the screen.
The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
More keypad languages settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
More keypad languages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other
than those in the currently selected language to be entered.
Unit settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Units
.
Distance:
- distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Fuel consumption:
- Consumption units
Pressure:
- Tyre pressure units
Settings for data transfer
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment sys-
tem and the external device or the operation of some Infotainment functions
using the applications of the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Mobile device data trans-
fer
.
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Switch data transfer on and off
Use apps to operate:
- Configure Infotainment operation via the applications of
the external device (applies to infotainment Amundsen)
Deactivate
- Deactivation of Infotainment operation via an external device
Confirm
- Infotainment operation with required confirmation
Allow
- Infotainment operation without required confirmation
Voice control settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Voice control
.
Example commands (infotainment syst.)
- Switch menu display with basic language
commands on/off when activating voice control
Voice control session start tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal when
turning on the voice control
Voice control session end tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal when voice
control ends
Input tone in voice dialogue
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal for the voice
input
End tone in voice dialogue
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal for the voice
input
Safe removal of the external device
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Remove safely:
and se-
lect the external device to be removed.
Reset to factory settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu, all or only selected settings can be restored.
Bluetooth
®
settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch the Bluetooth
®
function on/off
Visibility:
- Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for Bluetooth
®
devices
on/off
Name:
- Change the name of the Bluetooth
®
unit
Paired devices
- Display the list of paired Bluetooth
®
devices
Find devices
- Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a
Bluetooth
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
Wireless settings
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
WLAN
.
101
Infotainment settings - Amundsen
WLAN
- List of available hotspots of external devices
WLAN
- Switch Infotainment WLAN on/off
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
- Establish a secure connection to the hot-
spot of the external device using WPS (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Manual settings
- Parameter settings for searching and connecting to the hot-
spot of the external device
Network name
- Enter the Hotspot name
Network key
- Access passkey setting
Security level:
- Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Connect
- Establish a connection
Find
- Search / Restore the list of available hotspots
Mobile hotspot
- Infotainment hotspot setting (the symbol
is displayed in the
function surface with the number of connected external devices)
Mobile hotspot
- Switch the Infotainment hotspot on/off
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
- Establish a secure connection to the Info-
tainment hotspot via WPS (applies to Amundsen)
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
- Parameter settings for connection to the Infotain-
ment hotspot
Security level:
- Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Network key
- Input of the access password
SSID: ...
- Name of the infotainment hotspot
Do not send network name (SSID)
-Turn Infotainment hotspot visibility on/off
Store
- Storage of the parameters set for the Infotainment hotspot
Network settings
Applies to infotainment Amundsen with the connected Carstick device.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Network
.
Network settings
- Sets the data connection from the associated telephone
service provider (APN settings)
Access point name: ...
- Access point name setting
User name: …
- User name setting
Passkey: …
- Password setting
Authentication
- Setting for the type of verification
Normal
- Without verification
Secure
- Verification required
Reset Access Point (APN)
- Delete the parameters for the network setting
Store
- Saves the parameters for the network setting
Network provider: ...
- Selection of the network provider (the menu item is visi-
ble when the SIM card is inserted in the CarStick device)
Data roaming
- Enable/disable the use of data roaming connection
Current connection details
- Display of information on data downloaded (tap the
function surface
Reset
to delete the data information)
Data connection:
- Usage settings for the data connection (Internet connection)
of the SIM card inserted in the CarStick device
Off
- Use of the data connection is not possible
Ask
- Use of the data connection is only possible after it has been confirmed
On
- Use of the data connection is possible at any time
ŠKODA Connect online services settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
.
Services Management
- Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off
Registration
- Enter the activation PIN code for online services (received in the
user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website)
System information
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
System information
.
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, the Bluetooth
®
software version, the navigation
database version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
To Update the POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website, tap on the function surface
Online update
.
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
102
Infotainment
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface .
Sound
- Sound settings
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Arrow buttons:
- Set the function of the function surfaces
Preset list
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Station list
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcast-
ing range
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches TP traffic program on/off
Delete presets
- Deletes the preset buttons
Station logos
- Manual management of station logos
Radio text
- Switches the radio text display (FM and DAB) on and off
Advanced settings
- Other settings that are different depending on the selected
broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
Region for station logo:
- Set the region for station logos
Automatic frequency control (AF)
- Activate/deactivate the search for alternative
frequencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
RDS Regional:
- Activate/deactivate automatic tracking of regionally related
stations
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
DAB traffic announcements
- Switch DAB traffic announcements on/off
Other DAB messages
- Switch other announcements on/off (e.g., warnings, re-
gional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB - DAB station tracking
- Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
on another frequency or in other station groups
Automatic DAB - FM switching
- Activate/deactivate auto-switching from DAB to
the FM broadcasting range if the DAB signal is lost
Automatic change from DAB to FM
In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by (

) while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system
automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
Media menu settings
In the main Media menu, tap function surface
.
Sound
- Sound settings
Mix/repeat including subfolders
- Activate/deactivate the title display including
subfolders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
WLAN
- WLAN settings (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Remove safely:
- Safe removal of the external device
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
Image menu settings
In the main Images menu, tap on function surface .
Image view:
- View setting
Mute
- Display the maximum image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Automatic
- Full screen display
103
Infotainment settings - Amundsen
Display time:
- Set the image display time in the slideshow
Repeat slideshow
- Switching the slideshow repeat on/off
Telephone menu settings
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Hands-free telephone
- Switching a call to the phone/back to Infotainment (the
menu item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 101
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Mailbox number:
- Enter the phone number of the mailbox
Sort by:
- Sorting of the telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
Forename
- Sort by contact's first name
Import contacts:
- Import phone contacts
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected tele-
phone)
Reminder: Remember your mobile
- Activate/deactivate the warning against
leaving your telephone in the car (if the telephone was connected to the In-
fotainment)
Show pictures for contacts
- Activate/deactivate the display of the images as-
signed to the contacts
Conference call
- Activate/deactivate conference calls
Network
- Set the telephone service provider network of the SIM card inser-
ted in the CarStick device (applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 102
SmartLink+ menu settings
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
ŠKODA applications
MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink
®
Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown
- Turn the display of Mirror link
®
appli-
cation messages on the Infotainment screen on/off
Navigation menu settings
Route options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Route options
.
Suggest 3 alternative routes
- Switch the menu for alternative routes on/off (eco-
nomical, fast, short)
Route:
- Set the preferred route
Most frequent routes
- Show/hide the menu of the most frequent routes in the
split screen
Dynamic route
- Switch on/off dynamic route recalculation due to TMC traffic
reports or online traffic reports
Avoid motorways
- Activate/deactivate the non-use of motorways in the
route calculation
Avoid ferries and motorail trains
- Activate/deactivate the non-use of ferries
and motorail trains in the route calculation
Avoid toll roads
- Activate/deactivate the use of toll roads for route calcula-
tion
Avoid tunnels
- Switch on/off use of tunnels for route calculation
Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
- Activate/deactivate the use of routes re-
quiring toll stickers on/off for route calculation
Show available toll stickers
- Selection of countries for which a valid toll sticker is
required (routes requiring toll stickers are used for route calculation)
Include trailer
- Activate/deactivate the setting to include the trailer in route
calculation » page 151
Map
In the main
Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
.
Show road signs
- Switch the display of traffic signs on/off
Lane guidance
- Activate/deactivate the display of lane guidance
Show favourites
- Activate/deactivate the display of favourites
Show POIs
- Activate/deactivate the display of POIs
Select categories for POIs
- Select the categories of displayed POIs
Show brand logos for POIs
- Activate/deactivate the company logos available
for the POIs shown
104
Infotainment
Traffic flow settings
- Setting for the display of a traffic obstruction received
from online traffic
Display free-moving traffic
- Activate/deactivate the display of routes with
free-moving traffic
Display congestion
- Activate/deactivate the display of routes with heavy traf-
fic
Display traffic events (symbols on map)
- Activate/deactivate the display of
routes with a traffic incident
Manage memory
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
.
Sort contacts:
- Configure the phonebook layout
By surname
- Sorting by the contact surname
By first name
- Sorting by the contact first name
Define home address
- Enter the home address
Delete "My POIs"
- Delete your own POI categories (Personal POI)
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
- Import/update your own POI categories (Personal
POI)
Retrieve "My POIs" (online)
- Online import/update of your own POI categories
created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
Import destinations (SD/USB)
- Import destinations in vCard format
Delete user data
- Delete user data (by tapping function surface
Delete
and con-
firming the deletion)
Last destinations
- Delete the last destinations
Dest. memory
- Delete the stored destinations
Online destinations
- Delete the stored online destinations
Routes
- Delete saved routes
My points of interest (Personal POI)
- Delete the custom POIs
Entered cities
- Delete the history of places already entered via the address
Home address
- Delete the stored home address
Flagged destination
- Delete the flagged destination
Most frequent routes
- Delete the most travelled routes
Navigation announcements
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Navigation announce-
ments
.
Volume
- Volume control of the navigation announcements
Entertainment fad. (Navigation)
- Adjust the fading of the audio volume (e.g. radio
volume) when navigation announcements are being made
No navigation announcements during calls
- Activate/deactivate non-playback of
navigation announcements during a telephone call
Note: “My POIs”
- Activate/deactivate an audible indication when approaching a
custom POI (if supported by the imported custom POI)
Speed limits
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Speed limits
.
The maximum speed limits for the current country are displayed.
If the
Note: national border crossed
» page 106, Advanced settings function is acti-
vated, the country-specific speed limits are displayed when you cross the in-
ternational border.
Fuel options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Fuel options
.
Select preferred fuel station
- Select your preferred fuel station brand (the selec-
ted station brand will be displayed in the first three positions of the list)
Fuel warning
– Activate/deactivate the display of a warning message with the
option to search for the nearest petrol station when the fuel level reaches
the reserve area
Version information
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
A list of countries is displayed that exist for the navigation data, together with
the date of the last update.
The navigation data can be updated by tapping on the
Update function surface
(SD/USB)
or
Online update
.
The information on updating the navigation data can be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA websites.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
105
Infotainment settings - Amundsen
Advanced settings
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Time display:
- Select the time display in the status line
- Estimated arrival time at destination
- Estimated travelling time to the destination
Status line:
- Selection of the destination type for which the status line, the
route and travel time are displayed (this also determines which destination
type is displayed in the map after selecting )
- Route destination
- Next stopover
Note: national border crossed
- Activate/deactivate the display of country-specif-
ic speed limits when crossing national borders
Demo mode
- Activate/deactivate guidance in demo mode
Define demo mode starting point
- Specify the start point of the route guidance in
demo mode by entering the address or the current vehicle position
Infotainment settings – Swing
Infotainment system settings
Sound settings
Press the

or

button, then tap the function surface
Sound
.
Volume
- Volume settings
Maximum switch-on volume
- Set the maximum volume when switching on In-
fotainment
Announcements
- Adjustment of traffic announcements volume (TP)
Speed-dep. vol.adjust.
- Volume increases as speed increases
Entertainment fading
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) with acti-
vated parking aid
Entertainment fad. (Navigation)
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) in
the event of a navigation announcement
AUX volume
- Sets the volume for the device connected via AUX
Bluetooth audio
- Volume setting of the device connected via Bluetooth
®
au-
dio profile
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Sets the equalizer
Touchscreen tone
- Activates/deactivates the acoustic tone when touching the
screen
ŠKODA Surround
- Switch surround sound on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Virtual Subwoofer
-Switch virtual subwoofer on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Display settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Screen
.
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Display clock when screen is off
- Time and date display when the screen is
switched off
Brightness:
- Screen brightness setting
Touchscreen tone
- Switch audible tone when touching the screen on/off
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
106
Infotainment
Time and date settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Time and date
.
Time:
- Time Settings
Time Format:
- Sets the time format
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
Automatic summer time
- Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Sets the date format
Infotainment language settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
More keypad languages settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
More keypad languages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other
than those in the currently selected language to be entered.
Unit settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Units
.
Distance:
- distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Fuel consumption:
- Fuel consumption units
Pressure:
- Tyre pressure units
Activating/deactivating data transfer
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment and an
external device.
Press the

button and then tap on the function surface
Activate data trans-
fer for ŠKODA apps
.
Safe removal of the external data source
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Remove safely
and select
the external device to be removed.
Reset to factory settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu, individual settings or all settings can be restored at the same
time.
Bluetooth
®
settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch the Bluetooth
®
function on/off
Visibility:
- Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for Bluetooth
®
devices
on/off
Forename
- Change the name of the Bluetooth
®
unit
Paired devices
- Display the list of paired Bluetooth
®
devices
Find devices
- Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a
Bluetooth
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
Settings of online services ŠKODA Connect
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online serv-
ices)
.
Services Management
- Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off
Registration
- Enter the activation PIN code for online services (received in the
user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website)
System information
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
System information
.
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
107
Infotainment settings – Swing
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface .
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Sound
- Sound settings
Arrow buttons:
- Set the function of the function surfaces
Presets
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Stations
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcasting
range
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
Radio text
- Switches the radio text display (FM and DAB) on and off
Sort station list:
- Sorting types for radio stations in the station list
By group
- Group sorting by transmitted program
Alphabet
- Alphabetically order according to station name
Station logos
- Manual management of station logos
Delete presets
- Delete the stations stored under preset buttons
Advanced settings
- Other settings that are different depending on the selected
broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
RDS Regional:
- Activate/deactivate automatic tracking of regionally related
stations
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Automatic frequency control (AF)
- Activates/deactivates the search for alterna-
tive frequencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
Sort station list:
- Sorting types for radio stations in the station list
By group
- Group sorting by transmitted program
Alphabet
- Alphabetically order according to station name
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
DAB traffic announcements
- Enable/disable DAB announcements
Other DAB messages
- Switch other announcements on/off (e.g., warnings, re-
gional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB - DAB station tracking
- Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
on another frequency or in other station groups
Automatic DAB - FM switching
- Enable/disable auto-switching from DAB to the
FM frequency band if the DAB signal is lost
DAB program tracking
When a DAB transmitter is a part of several broadcast stations and if the cur-
rent station group is not available on any other frequency, then when the signal
is poor, the same station will be searched in another station group.
Automatic change from DAB to FM
In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by (

) while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system
automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
Media menu settings
In the main Media menu, tap function surface .
Sound
- Sound settings
Mix/repeat including subfolders
- Activate/deactivate the title display including
subfolders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
108
Infotainment
Activate AUX
- Enable/disable the AUX input
Remove safely:
- Safe removal of the external device
Telephone menu settings
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Hands-free telephone
- Switching a call to the phone/back to Infotainment (the
menu item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Find
- Search for available phones
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 107
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Sort by:
- Sorting of the telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
Forename
- Sort by contact's first name
Import contacts
- Import phone contacts
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected tele-
phone)
Reminder: Remember your mobile
- Activate/deactivate the warning against leav-
ing your telephone in the car (if the telephone was connected to the Infotain-
ment)
Simultaneous calls
- Enable/disable the option to hold two concurrent calls
SmartLink+ menu settings
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
ŠKODA applications
MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink
®
Connect automatically via Bluetooth
- Activate/deactivate the option of pairing
and connecting the external device via Bluetooth
®
Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown
- Activate/deactivate the display of
Mirror link
®
application messages on the Infotainment screen
Infotainment settings – Blues
Infotainment system settings
Introduction to the subject
Individual menu items for the Infotainment settings can be accessed by press-
ing one of the buttons below.
Sound settings » page 109
Infotainment settings » page 109
Settings of the currently opened Radio » page 110 or Media menu
» page 110
Sound settings
Press the

button repeatedly.
The following menu items of the settings are displayed in sequence.
Bass
- bass setting
Middle
- mid-tone setting
Treble
- treble setting
Balance
- Sets the balance between the left and right-hand sides
Fader
- Sets the sound focus between front/rear (applies to vehicles with rear
speakers)
Infotainment settings
Press the

button repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
GALA
- Speed-sensitive volume adjustment (higher numbers indicate a steep-
er increase in the volume level)
On volume
- Sets the maximum volume when the Infotainment is switched on
TP volume
- Sets the volume for in-coming traffic program alerts (TP)
PDC audio
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) when the parking aid
is activated
Low
- Low volume attenuation
Middle
- Medium volume attenuation
High
- High volume attenuation



109
Infotainment settings – Blues
Clock
- Time display on the Infotainment display (with the ignition on and the
Infotainment off)
Yes
- Switches the display on
No
- Switches the display off
Restore
- Reset to factory settings
Press
- Confirmation of the factory settings
Radio menu settings
When the Radio menu is open, press button

repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
TP
- Sets the traffic news reception
Yes
- Traffic news is being received
No
- Traffic news is not being received
Scan
- Browse available radio stations
Press
- Start the scan
Manual
- Manual selection of a radio station
Press
- Start manual selection
Arrows
- Sets the station selection (function of the
or
button)
Stations
- Select from the list of available stations
Presets
- Select from the preset buttons
Media menu settings
With the Media menu open, press button

repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
Mix
- Switch random play on/off
Off
- Switch off
On
- Switch on
Repeat
- Repeat playback
All
- From the current source
Track
- Track
Folder
- Folder
TP
- Sets the traffic news reception
Yes
- Traffic news is being received
No
- Traffic news is not being received
AUX
- Activate/deactivate the AUX input
On
- Activation
Off
- Deactivation
AUX vol.
- Sets the input level of the AUX audio source (the menu item is only
available when an audio source is connected)
Low
- Low volume
Middle
- Medium volume
High
- High volume
110
Infotainment
Radio
Operation
Introduction to the subject
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the Infotainment type, analogue ra-
dio reception of the FM and AM frequency ranges as well as DAB digital radio
reception is possible.
CAUTION
For vehicles with window antennas, do not stick foil or metal coated stickers
to the window - radio signal reception could be affected.
Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio
signal. even causing it to fail completely.
Main menu
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 128
Radio: Main Menu (DAB)
To display the main menu, press button

.
or: Press button

, then tap function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 128
The selected radio station (name or frequency)
Radio text (FM) / Description of the group (DAB)
Preset buttons for favourite stations
Choice of radio broadcasting range (FM / AM / DAB)
Choice of storage group for the preferred station
Change the station
List of available stations
A
B
C
D
E
Manual / semi-automatic station search
Radio text display (DAB) / picture presentation (DAB)
Settings of the Radio menu » page 103 or » page 108
Information symbol in the status line
Symbol Meaning
 Traffic signal is available
  Traffic signal is not available
Signal is not available (DAB)
If the displayed station name continuously changes (dynamic text), then it is
possible to fix the current text by holding your finger on the device screen in
the station name area. By holding your finger in the area of the station name
again, the station name is displayed in its entirety again.
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 129
Display
Description of the display » Fig. 129
The selected broadcasting range
The selected radio station (frequency or identifier)
Status bar
Symbols in the status bar
C
Symbol Meaning
 Browse radio frequency range manually
 Browse radio frequency range automatically
-
Number of a position (station button) under which the
radio station is stored
A
B
C
111
Radio
Symbol Meaning
Sound off
 A traffic information station is available
 No traffic information station is available
Choose broadcasting range
Each broadcasting area has two storage groups - FM1 and FM2 or AM1 and
AM2.
Press the

button repeatedly.
Searching for stations and selecting the frequency
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Searching for stations
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
or
.
Depending on the setting
Arrow buttons:
, an available station from the Sta-
tion list or a station stored to the Preset buttons for the currently selected
radio frequency range is set.
Selecting the frequency
To display the value of the currently chosen frequency, go to the main Radio
menu and tap the function surface
.
To set the desired frequency value use the slider or the function surfaces
in the bottom area of the screen, if necessary, turn the controller
.
Scanning through the stations one after the other (scan)
The function scans through all the available stations in the current frequency
range in succession, for a few seconds each.
To start automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Radio
menu and tap on the function surface
Scan
.
To end automatic scanning, tap the function surface .
Searching for stations and selecting the frequency
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Searching for stations
The Infotainment will automatically search for available radio stations in the
background, which can be selected immediately after the Infotainment is
switched on.
Press button
or
.
You will switch to the previous or next station.
Semi-automatic station search
Press and hold button
or
.
A search commences in the selected direction and stops at the next station
with sufficient signal strength.
Selecting the frequency
Press button

Manual
.
Press button
or
repeatedly and set the desired value for the frequency
range.
The value of the frequency range changes by 0.1 MHz on the FM band and 9
kHz in the AM band.
Scanning through the stations one after the other (scan)
Press button

Scan
.
The search starts.
This function plays all the available stations in succession for a few seconds
each.
Pressing the
button again ends the search and the current station remains
set.
Selecting a station from the preset list
By pressing the respective button
-
, it changes to the station stored under
the given position in the current storage group (e.g. FM1).
112
Infotainment
List of available stations
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 130 Example list of available FM/DAB stations
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
range, go to the main Radio menu and tap the function surface
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To sort (FM) the stations in alphabetical order, by group or genre, tap on the
function surface
A
» Fig. 130 » .
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
range, go to the main Radio menu and tap the function surface
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To filter the stations based on the program type (e.g. Music, Sport etc.) in the
FM station list (with activated RDS function) and the DAB station list (with
alphabetical sorting of the channel list selected), tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 130.
Information symbols
Symbol Meaning
Radio station, which is stored on a preset button
Currently played station
 Traffic information station
(e.g.)  Type of program being broadcast (FM)
(e.g.)  Type of regional broadcast (FM)
Signal reception is not available (DAB)
Symbol Meaning
The transmitter reception is not secure (DAB) (applies to Info-
tainment Amundsen, Swing)
Stations with image broadcasting (DAB) (does not apply to info-
tainment Swing)
Refresh list
The station list is updated automatically in the FM radio range.
In the AM and DABradio area, the update takes place manually by pressing the
function button » Fig. 130.
CAUTION
To sort the stations according to genre, the RDS and AF functions must be
switched on. These functions can be switched on/off in the main Radio menu
in the FM band by tapping the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Preset buttons for your favourite stations
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
In every broadcasting range, there are station buttons available to store pre-
ferred stations
C
, which are split into groups
E
» Fig. 128 on page 111.
To save a station in the main Radio menu, hold down the desired function
surface
C
until an acoustic signal sounds.
To save a station in the station list, keep the function surface of the desired
station held down, select the memory group, and then tap the desired station
button.
Presets for preferred stations
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Storing manually
Select a preset group (e.g. FM1).
Press and hold one of the preset buttons
-
.
The station is stored in the selected position.
Storage is confirmed by an acoustic signal and by the display of the station
button number in the status line of the display.
113
Radio
Automatic storage
Press and hold button

.
In the Infotainment display, the following text appears
AutoStore ...
and in the
current storage group (e.g. FM1), six radio stations are stored with the stron-
gest signal.
Station logos - Amundsen
In the Infotainment memory, you can store station logos, which are assigned
automatically by the device when stations are stored under preset buttons.
Assigning a station logo automatically
To deactivate/activate, go to the main Radio menu and tap the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
Autostore station logos
.
Assigning a station logo manually
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Removing a station logo manually
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, gif, png, bmp.
We recommend a resolution of up to 500x500 pixels.
Station logos - Swing
The station button for a preferred station can contain the name and the sta-
tion logo.
Assigning a station logo
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Removing a station logo
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
or: Tap on the function surface
All areas
to delete the logos of all station
buttons at the same time.
Confirm/cancel the removal.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, png.
We recommend a resolution of up to 400x240 pixels.
TP Traffic program
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Swing
To activate/deactivate traffic monitoring, go to the main Radio menu and
tap on function surface
Traffic program (TP)
.
Applies to Infotainment Blues
To activate/deactivate traffic monitoring, go to the Radio menu and press
button

TP
Yes
/
No
.
During a traffic announcement, it is possible to cancel the current announce-
ment or to deactivate traffic monitoring.
Note
If the station that is currently set does not transmit traffic reports or the sig-
nal is not available, then Infotainment automatically searches in the back-
ground for another TP station.
During playback in the Media menu or a station in the AM radio range, traffic
news is received from the previously selected FM radio range.
114
Infotainment
Media
Operation
Main menu
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 131
Media: Main Menu
To display the main menu, press button

.
or: Press button

, then tap function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 131
Information on the track being played
Playback timeline with a slider
Audio source selection
Selected audio source / album image / album overview
Depending on the audio source type:
Folder/track list
Multimedia database
Settings for the Media menu » page 103 or. » page 108
Note
Information concerning the track being played appears on the screen, if it is
stored as a so-called ID3 Tag on the audio source. If no ID3 tag is available, only
the track name is displayed.
The remaining playback time indicated does not correspond to the actual re-
maining playback time for tracks with variable bit rates (VBR).
A
B
C
D
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 132
Display
To display the main menu, press button

.
Description of the display » Fig. 132
Information line
Name of the track being played
Status bar
Select audio source
Press the

button again.
The Infotainment only switches between connected audio sources with playa-
ble content.
The Infotainment can detect a maximum of 1024 directories in the connected
audio sources and can play back a maximum of 6500 files. The Infotainment
can play a max 1024 files from a directory.
Adjusting
With the Media menu open, press button

» page 110.
Symbols in the information line
A
Symbols in the status bar
C
A
B
C
115
Media
Playback control - Amundsen
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Finger movement to the right of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 131 on page 115
after 3 seconds from the start of
track playback
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Play the previous track
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
Finger movement to the right of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 131 on page 115
within 3 seconds of the start of track
playback
Play the next track
Tap
Finger movement to the left of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 131 on page 115
Switch random playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback of specific
track on/off
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 131 on page 115.
Playback control - Swing
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Play the previous track
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
Function Action
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Play the next track Tap
Switch random playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback of specific
track on/off
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 131 on page 115.
Playback control - Blues
Function Action
Play/Pause Press
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Plays the current track from the start
Press
(3 seconds after
the start of the title play-
back)
Play the previous track
Press
(within 3 sec-
onds after the start of
the track playback)
Play the next track Press
Change to/to previous folder/play-list of the cur-
rent audio source
a)
Press
Change to/to next folder/play-list of the current
audio source
a)
Press
a)
The function is not supported by Apple devices.
116
Infotainment
Folder/track list
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 133
Folder/track list
To display the folder/track list in the Media main menu, tap on the function
surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected source).
To playback, select a track.
Folder/track list » Fig. 133
Selected audio source/audio source folder (move within the folder by tap-
ping the function surface for the folder)
Folder/track playback options
Display of multimedia database (only available in the source directory) (not
applicable to the Infotainment Swing)
Audio source selection
Folder
Playlist
Track currently being played/track playback stopped
The title cannot be played (tapping on the function surface shows the
cause).
Note
In the list, the first 1000 entries (tracks, directories etc.) with the oldest crea-
tion date are displayed.
The scanning speed of the folder/track list depends on the connection speed
and volume of data.
A
B
C
Multimedia database
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 134
Multimedia database
To display the multimedia database, go to the main Media menu and tap on
the function surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected
source).
The audio files are sorted by their properties into individual categories
B
.
To playback, select the category and then the track.
Multimedia database » Fig. 134
Selected audio source/Selected category/Folder of the audio source
Sorting categories
Display of folder/track list (only available in the source directory)
Audio source selection
Audio sources
Introduction to the subject
CAUTION
Do not save any important data or data which has not been backed up on the
connected audio sources. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or dam-
aged files or connected audio sources.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
When connecting an external audio source, the external source information
messages can be displayed. These messages must be observed and, if neces-
sary, confirmed (e.g. enabling data transfer etc).
A
B
C
117
Media
Note
The national copyright laws that apply in your country must be observed.
SD card
Fig. 135
Amundsen: insert SD card
Fig. 136
Swing/Blues: Insert SD card
Inserting
Insert the SD card in the slot in the direction of arrow (with the cut end fac-
ing right), until it “locks into place” » Fig. 135 or » Fig. 136.
Removing
Before removing the SD card, go to the main Media menu and tap function
surface → Tap on
Remove safely
.
Push down on the inserted SD memory card. The SD card “jumps” into the
eject position.
CAUTION
Do not use an SD card with a broken write protection “slide” - there is a risk
of damage to the SD card reader!
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vibrations might cause the
card to fall out of the adapter.
USB input
Installation location of the USB input and information regarding its use
» page 74.
At the USB input, an audio source can be connected directly or via a connect-
ing cable.
To connect, insert the USB audio source into the appropriate input.
To disconnect the USB, go to the main Media menu and tap on the function
surface
→ Tap on
Remove safely
.
Disconnect the audio source from the corresponding USB input.
Charging a USB audio source
With the ignition, the charging process starts automatically after the USB au-
dio source is connected (applies to audio sources where charging via the USB
connector is possible).
The charging efficiency can differ compared to charging from the usual mains
power supply.
Depending on the type of the connected external device and the frequency of
use, the charging current may not be sufficient to charge the battery of the
connected device.
Some connected audio sources may not recognise that they are being charg-
ed.
CAUTION
USB extension cables or reducers may impair the function of the connected
audio source.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
118
Infotainment
AUX input
Installation location of the AUX input » page 74.
To connect, insert the plug of the AUX audio source into the appropriate
connector.
To disconnect, pull the plug out of the AUX audio source.
CAUTION
The AUX input must only be used for audio devices!
If the external audio source connected to the AUX input is equipped with an
adapter for external power supply, the sound may be impaired.
Note
The 3.5 mm stereo jack plug is used for the AUX input.
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
Bluetooth
®
player
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
The Infotainment system allows you to play back audio files from a connected
Bluetooth
®
player using the A2DP and AVRCP audio profile.
With the Infotainment system, multiple devices can be paired using Blue-
tooth
®
, but only one of them can be used as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Connecting/disconnecting
To connect the Bluetooth
®
player to the Infotainment system, follow the
same instructions as for pairing the Infotainment system with a telephone
» page 127.
To disconnect the Bluetooth
®
player, end the connection in the list of paired
external devices » page 127.
Replacing the Bluetooth
®
player (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
To replace a Bluetooth
®
player, which is also connected to the Infotainment
system as a telephone, a corresponding information message will be displayed
on the Infotainment screen.
End the connection to the currently connected Bluetooth
®
player and repeat
the pairing procedure » page 127, Managing paired external devices.
CAUTION
If an external device is connected to the Infotainment system using Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be connected using Bluetooth
®
.
WLAN
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The Infotainment system allows you to play audio files from one of the exter-
nal devices connected to the Infotainment WLAN.
Connect an external device that supports the DLNA (Digital Living Network
Alliance), with Infotainment WLAN» page 133.
If necessary, start the UPnP application (Universal Plug and Play) in the con-
nected device, which allows playback.
Select the audio source
WLAN
.
119
Media
Supported audio sources and file formats - Amundsen
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification
File sys-
tem
SD card SD reader Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without
any special soft-
ware);
USB devices sup-
porting MSC
mode
MTP
Devices with the
Android operat-
ing system or
Windows mobile
(mobile phone,
tablet)
Apple
Devices with the
iOS operating
system (iPhone,
iPod, iPad)
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio
9 and 10
wma 384 kbit / s
96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
m3u8
asx
WAV wav
Defined by
the format
(approx. 1.5
Mbit/s)
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
Layer 3
mp3
320 kbit / s
48 kHz
MPEG-2 and 4
aac; mp4;
m4a
FLAC;
OGG-Vorbis
flac; ogg
Defined by
the format
(approx. 5.5
Mbit/s)
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
120
Infotainment
Supported audio sources and file formats – Swing
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices supporting
MSC mode
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Blue-
tooth
®
-
Player
- -
Bluetooth protocols
A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 -
1.4)
-
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 10
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
asx
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
(Layer-3)
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Supported audio sources and file formats – Blues
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD; SDHC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices supporting
MSC mode
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio 9
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
asx
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
(Layer-3)
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
121
Media
Images
Image viewer
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 137
Images: main menu
To display the main menu, press

, then tap the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 137
Select the image source
Folder/image list
Display the previous image
Switch on the slideshow
Switch off the slideshow
Display the next image
Images menu settings » page 103
Rotate the image 90° anticlockwise
Rotate the image 90° clockwise
Display the original image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Guidance to GPS coordinates (the display only occurs if the image con-
tains GPS coordinates) (applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 148
A
Controlling viewed images
Function Action
Display the next image
Finger movement across the screen to the
left (with initial representation)
Tap
Display the previous image
Finger movement across the screen to the
right (with initial representation)
Tap
Increase the image size
Touch the screen with two fingers and pull
apart
Turn the knob to the right
Reduce the image size
Touch the screen with two fingers and close
together
Turn the knob to the left
Move the image with an en-
larged display
Drag your finger over the screen in the re-
quired direction
Rotate by 90 °
Touch the screen with two fingers and move
clockwise or anti-clockwise (only available
with initial representation)
Tap or
Maximum magnification of dis-
play
Double tap on the screen
Display the original image size
while retaining the aspect ratio
Double tap on the screen again
Press the knob
CAUTION
Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Ap-
ple devices.
122
Infotainment
Supported image file formats and sources
Supported image sources
Source Type Specification File system
SD card Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB devices
USB stick;
HDD (without
any special soft-
ware)
USB 1.x; 2.x and
3.x or higher with
support of USB
2.x
Supported file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix
Max. resolution
(Megapixels)
BMP bmp 4
JP(E)G jpg; jpeg 4; 64
GIF gif 4
PNG png 4
Note
The max. supported image size is 20 MB.
The images sources structured into areas in accordance with the GPT stand-
ards (GUID partition table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Media Command
Using the system
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 138
ŠKODA Media Command appli-
cation
The Media Command function allows you to control the playback of audio files
or videos in up to two tablets that are connected to the Infotainment system
via WLAN in the Infotainment system.
The Media Command function enables operation of tablets with the Android
or iOS operating system.
The prerequisite for the Media Command function is that data transmission is
activated and that operation of the Infotainment system via the application is
approved » page 96.
Connecting a tablet to the Infotainment system
Switch on the Infotainment hotspot (press button

and then tap function
surface
WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
).
Turn on WLAN in the tablet.
Establish a WLAN connection in the tablet » page 133, Connecting via
WLAN.
In the tablet, start the ŠKODA Media Command application.
ŠKODA Media Command application
The application is available in the App Store and Google Play online shops.
Information regarding the application and the option to download the applica-
tion can be found on a website that can be opened by reading the QR code
» Fig. 138.
123
Media Command
CAUTION
If several devices are connected to the Infotainment system by means of
WLAN, there is the danger of WLAN overloading and thus also the inability of
Media Command to function properly.
High-definition video playback (e.g. HD) may cause playback problems or
problems connecting the tablets to the Infotainment system.
Main menu
Fig. 139
One tablet / two tablets
To display the main Media Command menu, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 139
Information on the track being played
Playback timeline with a slider
Playback control
Image from the video being played back
Name of the tablet used/Switch to main menu of two tablets (when icon
displayed )
Increase/decrease the tablet volume
Display of main menu and operation of first tablet (symbol )
Display of main menu and operation of second tablet (symbol
)
Playback source selection
WLAN settings » page 101
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Selecting the source and controlling playback
To select the playback source, go to the main menu and tap the function
surface and select the source tablet.
To playback, select the category and then the track.
If two tablets are connected, track playback starts in the two tablets at the
same time.
Playback can be controlled via the Infotainment system or on each tablet, in-
dependently of each other. This means there is an option to play back different
tracks on the tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap
after 3 s from the start of the track
playback
Play the previous track
Tap
within 3 seconds from the start of the
track playback
Play the next track Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 139 on page 124.
Note
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or videos from an SD card in-
serted in the tablet. Playback of these tracks may be limited.
Supported file formats
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Video
MPEG-4 Part 2
MPEG-4 Part 10
(H264)
XVID
124
Infotainment
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Audio
MPEG-1;2 and
2.5
Layer 3 (mp3)
AAC (4,1+)
M4A (4,1+)
OGG
FLAC
WAV (4,1+)
Telephone
Introductory information
Introduction to the subject
WARNING
The general binding country-specific regulations for operating mobile tele-
phones in the vehicle must be observed.
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 140
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to the Info-
tainment system.
To display, press the

button.
or: Press button

, then tap function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 140
Name of the main telephone
Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the symbol
appears before the name )
Symbol of the main telephone
(tap to display the list of paired tele-
phones)
Swap the main telephone and the additional telephone
Enter the telephone number
A
B
C
D
E
125
Telephone
List of contacts
Menu with text messages (SMS)
Call list
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 104
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Incoming SMS
PIN code of the SIM card was not entered
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Swing.
Fig. 141
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to the Info-
tainment system.
To display, press the

button.
To display the Telephone main menu if a different menu is displayed, which was
open last, press the

button again.
Main menu » Fig. 141
Name of the main telephone (tap to display the list of paired telephones)
Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the sym-
bol appears before the name )
F

A
B
C
D
Enter the telephone number
List of contacts » page 128
Call list (missed calls, in addition to the function surface, the number of
calls when missed is displayed)
Starting voice control of the connected phone (e.g. Apple Siri, Google
Voice)
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 109
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Pairing and connecting
Introduction to the subject
To connect a telephone to the Infotainment system, the two devices must be
paired via Bluetooth
®
.
Depending on the Infotainment model, up to 20 external devices can be paired
with the device. After the maximum number is reached, the pairing of the next
external device will replace that of the device that has not been used for the
longest period of time.
Connection to an already paired telephone is established automatically after
the ignition is switched on. Or, it is sufficient to search for the phone in the list
of paired devices.
The range of the telephone connection to the Infotainment system is limited
to the passenger compartment.
Compatibility and update
By scanning the QR code » Fig. 113 on page 90 or typing the following address
into the web browser, information about the compatibility of phones and avail-
able updates for the Infotainment's Bluetooth
®
can be displayed.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
126
Infotainment
Conditions for pairing
The ignition is switched on.
The Bluetooth
®
function of the Infotainment system and the telephone is
switched on.
The visibility of the Infotainment system and the telephone is switched on.
The telephone is within range of the Infotainment system's Bluetooth
®
sig-
nal.
The telephone is compatible with the Infotainment system.
No external device is connected to the Infotainment system using Apple
CarPlay.
Pairing and connection process
Pairing the telephone with the Infotainment system
Find available external Bluetooth
®
devices in your telephone.
Select the name of the Infotainment system.
The name of the Infotainment system can be checked in the Telephone main
menu if you tap on the function surface
Bluetooth
In the
Name:
menu item.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
The telephone is connected to the Infotainment or just paired, depending on
the number of external devices that are already connected » page 127.
Pairing the Infotainment system with the telephone
If no telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, press the

but-
ton, then tap the
Find telephone
function surface or press the

button, then
tap function surface
Find telephone
.
If one telephone is connected to the infotainment system, then, in the Tele-
phone main menu, tap on the
Find telephone
function surface.
Select the desired telephone from the list of retrieved external Bluetooth
®
devices.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
WARNING
Do not pair and connect a telephone to the Infotainment system while driv-
ing the vehicle - there is risk of an accident!
Possible connection types
Depending on the number of connected Bluetooth
®
devices and the connec-
tion type, the following functions are available.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
First device (main telephone)
Second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (incoming/outgoing calls), SMS,
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
HFP (incoming calls),
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only one external device can be connected to the Infotainment system as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
First device (main telephone)
Second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (incoming/outgoing calls),
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only one external device can be connected to the Infotainment system as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Managing paired external devices
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
Bluetooth
Paired
devices
.
In the list of paired external devices, the following symbols may appear for the
individual external devices.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Function
Grey External device can be connected as a telephone
Green External device is connected as a telephone
Grey
External device can be connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
White External device is connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
127
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Function
White External device can be connected as a telephone
Green External device is connected as a telephone
White
External device can be connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
Green External device is connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
Connection set-up
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles.
If external Bluetooth
®
devices are already connected to the Infotainment sys-
tem, then the Infotainment system will display messages and options for the
possible connection type (e.g. replacement of the connected external Blue-
tooth
®
device) during the connection process.
Disconnection
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles.
Deleting the paired external device
To delete, tap on one of the following function surfaces.
- Delete all external devices
- Delete the desired external device
Confirm the deletion by tapping on the function surface
Delete
.
Telephone functions
Enter telephone number and select
Entering a telephone number and dialling
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Function surfaces of the numeric keypad
Enter the last dialled number/dial the telephone number entered
Emergency call (only applies to some countries)
Breakdown call in case of breakdown
Delete all
or
All areas
Information call (for information regarding the products and services of
the ŠKODA brand)
Choose the mailbox number (the function is not supported for Infotain-
ment Swing)
Delete the last number entered
Display the function surfaces for movement of the cursor in the in-
put line
Searching for a contact using the numeric keypad
The numeric keypad can also be used to search for a contact.
For example, if you enter 32, the unit will display contacts with the letter se-
quence DA, FA, EB, etc. next to the numeric keypad.
Voicemail box (does not apply to Infotainment Swing)
To select the voice mailbox number, tap the function surface
.
If the voicemail number was not imported or entered, then this can be entered
or changed as follows.
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Mail-
box number:
.
Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
List of telephone contacts
Fig. 142
List of telephone contacts / contact details
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface and a list of tele-
phone contacts will be displayed » Fig. 142.
If the main telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, the telephone
contacts from the telephone are used.
128
Infotainment
Function surfaces
Contact search
Dial a number in the telephone contact list (if a telephone contact contains
several telephone numbers, a menu containing the telephone numbers as-
signed to this contact is displayed after the contact is selected)
Display the contact details
Select the telephone number in the contact details
Edit the telephone number of the contact before dialling
Infotainment Amundsen:
The contact name can be read out by the Infotainment system’s generated
voice
Open the menu for sending a text message (SMS)
Infotainment Amundsen:
Start the route guidance to the contact address
Import list
After the main telephone is connected to the Infotainment system for the first
time, the process for importing the telephone contacts into the device memo-
ry starts. The import can take several minutes.
The Infotainment system's telephone book contains 2000 free memory loca-
tions for imported telephone contacts. Each contact can contain up to 5 tele-
phone numbers.
The number of imported contacts can be determined in the menu item
User profile
Import contacts:
or.
Import contacts
being determined.
If an error occurs during the import, a corresponding message appears on the
screen.
Refresh list
When the telephone reconnects with the Infotainment system, the list is auto-
matically updated.
The list can be refreshed manually as follows.
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Import
contacts:
or tap on
Import contacts
A
B
C
Management of preferred contacts (favourites)
Fig. 143
Favourite contacts
Assigning favourites
In the main menu Telephone, tap on the desired function surface
A
» Fig. 143.
Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers).
Connecting to a favourite
The function surfaces for preferred contacts allow you to dial the contact tele-
phone numbers immediately.
The favourites are provided in two storage groups.
To Change storage group, tap on the function surface
B
» Fig. 143.
To dial, tap the assigned function surface
A
» Fig. 143.
Changing allocated favourites
In the main Telephone menu, press and hold the desired function surface
A
» Fig. 143.
Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers).
Deleting a favourite
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Man-
age favourites
.
Tap the desired function surface of the preferred contact and confirm the
deletion.
You can delete all contacts by tapping on the function surface
Delete all
/
All
areas
and confirming the delete process.
Function surface for emergency call
If the vehicle is not equipped with the buttons for the Care Connect service
» page 15, the position of the last function surface in the first group of favour-
ites will show the function surface for an emergency call . In some coun-
tries, this function may not be available.
129
Telephone
The function surface can be assigned a different number for the preferred
contact.
To restore the emergency number, it is necessary to remove the telephone
from the list of paired external devices » page 127 and then to pair and connect
again.
Call list
Fig. 144
Call history / Contact details
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface and a call list will be
displayed » Fig. 144.
The call list can also be displayed during a telephone call.
Function surfaces
Set the display depending on the type of call
All areas
- List of all calls
Missed calls
/
Missed calls
- List of missed calls
Dialled numbers
- List of dialled numbers
Received calls
/
Received
- List of received calls
Dial the contact number/telephone number
Call type symbols
- Answered call
- Outgoing call
- Missed call
Edit the telephone number before dialling (not applicable to Infotainment
Swing)
Display the contact details » Fig. 144
C
- Dial the contact number
A
B
Telephone call
Depending on the conversation context, the following functions can be carried
out.
End dialling/reject incoming call/end call
Accept an incoming call/return to a held call
Switch ring tone on/off
Keep talking
Switch microphone on/off
Infotainment Amundsen:
Set up a conference call
Show caller details (if the contact is stored in the list)
Switch hands-free on/off (call to the telephone/switch to Infotainment)
To deactivate the hands-free system, go to the main Telephone menu and tap
on the function surface
Tap on
hands-free
during a call.
To activate the hands-free system, tap on the function surface
during a
call.
Conference call
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The conference call is a shared call with between three and six participants.
Start a conference call/invite additional participants
Make the next call during a call/conference call.
or: Answer the new incoming call by tapping on function surface .
To initiate a conference call or return to a conference call, tap on the func-
tion surface .
Ongoing conference call
During an ongoing conference call, the call duration is displayed on the screen.
Depending on the context, the following functions can be selected.
Hold a conference call - Leave the conference call temporarily (the con-
ference call continues in your absence)
Return to the held conference call
Switch microphone on/off
130
Infotainment
End conference call
Display conference call details
Conference call details
During the ongoing conference call, tap the function surface .
A list of other conference participants is displayed. The following functions
can be selected depending on the type of telephone.
Display participant details
Talk to a participant separately, outside of the conference call
End the call to a conference call participant
Text messages (SMS)
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 145
Text messages main menu
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
and the main menu
for text messages will be displayed » Fig. 145.
Depending on the type of telephone connected, you can perform the following
functions.
Open a list of templates for quick answers
New text message
- Create and send the message
Inbox
- Open a list of received messages
Sent
- Open a list of sent messages
Outbox
- Open a list of messages not sent
Drafts
- Open a list of drafts (messages in progress)
Deleted
- Open a list of deleted messages
A
New text message
Creating and sending the message
In the main menu of the text messages, tap on function surface » Fig. 145
on page 131.
Write a text message and confirm. A view of the text message is displayed.
Tap the function surface tap .
Select the recipient of the message from the displayed contact list or tap the
function surface and enter the telephone number.
To add additional recipients, tap the function surface .
To send the text message, tap the function surface .
Viewing the text message
After opening the view message function, the following functions can be exe-
cuted.
The text can be read out by the device's generated voice
The text can be stored as a draft
Open a list of templates with the option to replace the recorded text with
the selected template
Open the contact list
The message can be edited, provided the text area is within the view.
Contact list
After the list has been opened the following functions can be executed.
Add a contact to the recipient list
Enter the telephone number
Return to message view
Tap on the
Find
function surface to open a list of available telephone contacts.
After selecting the contact number or entering the telephone number, the re-
cipient list will be displayed in the screen.
Recipient list
The following functions can be executed by tapping on one of the function
surfaces.
Display the contact list with the option of adding/removing additional
recipients (to return to the recipient list, tap the function surface )
Remove a contact from the recipient list
131
Telephone
Send the message
Return to message view
Received text message
When you receive a new message, the number of new messages received is
displayed within the function surface and at the same time the symbol is
displayed in the status bar.
To open a list of received messages, go to the Telephone main menu and
tap on function surface .
Select a message.
The message content and the following menu is displayed.
The text can be read out by the device's generated voice
Display a menu with additional options
Reply with template
- Reply using a template
Display numbers
- Recognition of telephone numbers in the message in-
cluding the contact number (recognised numbers can be dialled directly
or edited before dialling, or may be sent to this message)
Forward a message with the option to edit the message before sending
Reply to the sender via a message
Data connection
Internet connection
Connecting Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 146
WLAN/Carstick
Possible connection types » Fig. 146,
Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
the external device » page 133, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of
the external device.
Using the CarStick USB device » page 132.
Connecting via the CarStick device
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The CarStick USB device can be purchased from the original accessories.
Insert a SIM card with activated data services into the CarStick device.
The required dimensions of the SIM card can be found in the instructions en-
closed with the CarStick ŠKODA original accessory.
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment system.
Insert the Carstick Into the USB input at the front » Fig. 78 on page 74,
Wait approximately one minute until the red light on Carstick stays continu-
ously lit (if the red lights up, then disconnect and re-insert the Carstick).
A
B
132
Infotainment
If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  confirm.
or: the function area to save and confirm the PIN code.
If necessary, set the required network of the data service provider.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one
of the displayed providers can be used.
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the
menu item

Network
Network settings
.
CAUTION
If you insert a SIM card of the wrong size or in the wrong direction, there is a
risk of damage to the CarStick device.
Connecting via WLAN
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
WLAN can be used to connect to the Internet, to playback audio files in the
menu media or for operating the Infotainment system using an application in
the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
It is possible to connect up to 8 external devices to the Infotainment hotspot
and at the same time to connect Infotainment to another hotspot.
Switching the Infotainment hotspot on/off
Switch on the ignition.
Switch the hotspot on/off in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
Setting the Infotainment hotspot
The Infotainment hotspot is factory set.
The setting can be changed in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Security level:
- Type of access protection (always set to WPA2)
Network key
- Access password
SSID: ...
- Hotspot name
Do not send network name (SSID)
- Switch the visibility of the hotspot on/off
To save the configured parameters, tap the
Store
function surface.
Connecting an external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on WLAN in the external device and search for the infotainment hot-
spot.
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the required password.
Confirm the connection.
Note
The name of the infotainment hotspot (SSID) and the access password can be
found in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the external device
Fig. 147
Main menu of the Infotainment
WLAN
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a hotspot with WPA2
access protection.
Switch on the ignition.
If the Infotainment WLAN is not activated, activate it in the menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
In area
A
» Fig. 147, a list of available or previously connected hotspots is dis-
played.
The hotspot list can be updated by tapping the function surface
B
.
Select the hotspot and enter the password.
If the hotspot is not visible, you can establish the connection to it manually.
133
Data connection
Tap the function surface
Manual settings
.
Set the required hotspot parameters.
Tap on the function surface
Connect
.
Icons and function surfaces in the list of available hotspots
A
» Fig. 147
Connected hotspot
Signal strength of the connected hotspot
Delete the hotspot connection parameters
Connect via WPS
It is not necessary to enter the access password when connecting via WPS.
Connecting the Infotainment system to the hotspot of the external device
Switch on the ignition.
In the external device, switch on the hotspot, its visibility, and the WPS con-
nection option.
In the Infotainment system, switch on WLAN in menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
Tap the function area
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
Connecting the external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment hotspot in menu item

WLAN
Mobile
hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
Tap the function area
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
In the external device, switch on the WPS connection option.
SmartLink+
Introductory information
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Swing.
Fig. 148
Information on SmartLink on the
ŠKODA websites
SmartLink offers the option of displaying and operating certified applications
on an external device connected via USB on the Infotainment screen.
SmartLink supports the following communication systems.
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
MirrorLink
®
Using the applications in the connected external device, you can use naviga-
tion, make a call and listen to music.
For safety reasons, the operation of some applications while driving is not pos-
sible or only limited.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 148 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to open the website with information on the SmartLink system.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartlink
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be operated via the Infotainment system, using your voice or using the
buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.
To activate voice control for the connected external device, hold the

or

button or hold down the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
134
Infotainment
CAUTION
To establish the connection, the date and time in the Infotainment system
must be set correctly. If the date and time setting is based on the GPS signal,
then problems may arise with establishing a connection when the GPS signal
reception is poor.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
With some connected external devices, it is necessary for the connected ex-
ternal device to be “unlocked” for trouble-free functioning of the SmartLink
function.
Main menu
Fig. 149
Supported communication systems / Example of available
communication systems of the connected external device
To display the main SmartLink menu, press button

, then tap the function
surface .
or Press the

button (applies to Infotainment Swing).
If no external device is connected, then a menu with supported communica-
tion systems SmartLink is displayed
A
» Fig. 149,
Main menu » Fig. 149
Supported communication systems
Available communication systems of the connected external device
Display of information about SmartLink
Disconnection of the active connection
Settings of the SmartLink» page 104 menu or » page 109
A
B
Connection set-up / disconnection
Connection set-up
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment system.
Switch on the external device.
For connection via Apple CarPlay, switch on the data connection and the
voice control (Siri) in the external device to be connected.
Connect the external device to the USB input via a cable» page 74.
Select the type of supported communication system
B
» Fig. 149 on
page 135.
Disconnection of the active connection
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
Ordisconnect the cable from the USB input (the external device will be con-
nected automatically when reconnected).
Note
Some applications require the data connection in the connected external de-
vice to be switched on.
Android Auto
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established with a supported external device with
the Android Auto application installed.
By connecting the external device with Android Auto, all currently connected
Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected and the external device will automati-
cally be connected as the main telephone.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
If route guidance is taking place at this moment in the Infotainment system,
then there is the option to start the route guidance in the Android Auto appli-
cation. And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the
Android Auto application, then there is the possibility that this will be termina-
ted by the start of route guidance by the Infotainment system.
135
SmartLink+
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Android
Auto connection supports can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
Main menu
Fig. 150
Android Auto: main menu
Main menu » Fig. 150
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, telephone calls, accepted text messag-
es, tasks in the working directory, weather or similar.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as the option of returning to
the main SmartLink menu
Switching on voice control (Google Voice)
Next to the function surface in area
A
, the symbol
appears and then, after
tapping on this function surface again, a list of new applications is displayed.
Apple CarPlay
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
Apple CarPlay communication system.
By connecting the external device with Apple CarPlay, all currently connected
Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
Some phone features of the connected external device can be operated in the
display of the instrument cluster » page 51.
If route guidance is taking place at this moment using the Infotainment sys-
tem, then this is terminated by starting the route guidance in the Apple
CarPlay application. And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place
in the Apple CarPlay application, then this will be terminated by the start of
route guidance by the Infotainment system.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Apple
CarPlay connection supports can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
Main menu
Fig. 151
Apple CarPlay: main menu
Main menu » Fig. 151
List of available applications
More pages with applications
Depending on how long the function surface is pressed for:
Tap - Return to main Apple CarPlay menu
Hold - Switch on voice control (Siri)
MirrorLink
®
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
MirrorLink
®
communication system.
A
B
136
Infotainment
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: if you would like to
connect the device in the phone menu, the external device must be paired and
connected before establishing a connection » page 126.
Applies to Infotainment Swing: by connecting the external device, all currently
connected Bluetooth
®
devices and the external device are automatically con-
nected as the main phone. Depending on the device to be connected, a con-
nection confirmation may be required.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
Main menu
Fig. 152
MirrorLink®: Main menu
Main menu » Fig. 152
Return to SmartLink main menu » page 135
List of running applications
Display the contents of the connected external device
Settings of the SmartLink» page 104 menu or » page 109
List of applications
More pages with applications
Applications cannot be operated while driving
Display of the function surfaces during the running application
Return to main MirrorLink
®
menu
Show function surfaces at the top/bottom (applies to Infotainment
Amundsen)
Move the function surfaces to the desired corner of the screen
(applies to the Infotainment Swing)
A
B
To show/hide the function surfaces, press the controller (applies to Infotain-
ment Amundsen).
function problems
If problems occur with the MirrorLink
®
connection, one of the following mes-
sages may be displayed on the screen.
Error: transfer
– disconnect an reconnect the external device
MirrorLink® audio is unavailable.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external device
MirrorLink® availability on this mobile device is restricted.
- it is not possible to use the
connected device during the journey or the device only has limited availabili-
ty (applies to Infotainment swing)
The mobile device is locked. Please unlock the mobile device to use MirrorLink®
- “unlock”
the connected external device
Unable to start app or app not working.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external
device
ApplicationŠKODA OneApp
Introductory information
Fig. 153
Information on the ŠKODA
OneApp application on the ŠKO-
DA websites
A mobile telephone connected to the Infotainment system allows you to edit
and evaluate driving data in the ŠKODA One App application.
The ŠKODA OneApp application is available in the App Store and Google Play
online shops.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 153 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to open the website with information on the ŠKODA OneApp application.
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment
137
SmartLink+
For the full functionality of the ŠKODA One App application, data transfer
from external devices must be activated.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To activate data transfer from external devices, press the

button, then
tap on function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data transfer for
ŠKODA Apps
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To activate data from external devices, press the

button, then tap on
function surface →
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
.
Note
Some functions of the application are not available in all countries or there is a
function restriction during the journey » page 90, Mobile devices and applica-
tions.
Connecting to the Infotainment system
The mobile telephone can be connected to the infotainment system using the
SmartLink function or via WLAN.
Connection via SmartLink
Switch on the ignition.
Establish a connection via SmartLink (e.g. MirrorLink
®
) » page 134.
In the list of available applications, select the ŠKODA One App application.
Depending on the type of external device connected, some applications can be
started using voice activation, via the Infotainment or using the buttons on the
multi-function steering wheel.
Once connected, the contents of the application are displayed on the infotain-
ment screen.
A possible connection between the mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system via WLAN will be terminated after a connection is established using
SmartLink.
Connection via WLAN (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Switch on the ignition.
Establish the WLAN connection » page 133.
In the mobile telephone, start the ŠKODA OneApp application.
Disconnection
The connection can be disconnected in one of the following ways.
Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
End the connection in the ŠKODA OneApp application.
Disconnect the mobile telephone from the USB port or terminate the WLAN
connection.
138
Infotainment
Navigation
Introductory information
Navigation - function sequence
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Route guidance is started as follows.
Find/enter a new destination or select one of the stored destinations.
Confirm the route calculation in the destination details or, if necessary, adjust
the route options.
Select the preferred route type, if this is requested by the Infotainment sys-
tem.
A route is calculated and route guidance starts.
The route guidance is provided by means of graphical driving recommenda-
tions and navigation announcements.
There is an option to add additional destinations during route guidance, or to
adapt the route.
If a traffic radio station is available, information concerning traffic delays is
evaluated by the Infotainment system and, if necessary, an alternative route is
offered.
If you deviate from the route, then a new route is calculated.
GPS satellite signal
Infotainment uses the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite signal for
route guidance.
Outside the range of the GPS satellite signal (e.g. in dense vegetation, in tun-
nels, parking garages, etc.), the Infotainment system navigates only with re-
strictions, with the aid of vehicle sensors.
The Infotainment system offers the possibility off showing the following infor-
mation on the current geographical position of the vehicle and the satellite sig-
nal in the
Position
» Fig. 156 on page 141 split screen.
Geographical longitude
Geographical latitude
Elevation
Number of received/available satellites
If no GPS satellite signal is available, no values are displayed.
Navigation data
Navigation data source
The navigation data is stored on an Original SD Card.
In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the Original SD card, with the
navigation data, must be inserted in the respective slot in the external module
» page 92.
If the original SD card is damaged or lost, a new original SD card can be pur-
chased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
With a Non-original SD Card, navigation does not work.
Determining the version of the navigation data
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
Updating the navigation data
We recommend that you update the navigation data on a regular basis (e.g.
due to newly developed roads and changed traffic signs).
The information on updating the navigation data can be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA websites.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Importing/updating the POI categories online
When Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated, it is possible to
download the POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect portal websites.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Online update
Retrieve
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface .
A menu for the import/update of POI categories is displayed.
Select the desired list entries.
Tap on the function surface
Retrieve
and confirm the download process.
139
Navigation
During the update process, the Infotainment system can be used without re-
striction.
Main menu
Fig. 154
Navigation: Main menu
To display, press the

button.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface
.
Description of the function surfaces
A
» Fig. 154
Context-dependent:
Route guidance is deactivated - Search/enter a new destination
Route guidance is activated - The following menu is displayed:
Route details
- Displays the route details » page 153
Congestion ahead
- Manually adjusts traffic conditions » page 156
Enter destination
- Search for/enter a new destination/stopover
» page 141
Stop route guidance
- Stops route guidance » page 153
The following menu is displayed:
Save current position
- Store the current vehicle position as the flagged
destination » page 145
Routes
- Displays the list of saved routes » page 154
Destinations
- Displays the list of stored destinations » page 144
Last destinations
- Displays the list of recent destinations to which route
guidance was carried out » page 144
Home address
- Route guidance to your home address » page 145
Search for POIs in categories , and
Map display options » page 148
Operation of Media/Radio playback
Display for the volume setting of the navigation announcements/repeti-
tion of the navigation announcement » page 152
Navigation settings » page 104
Map
Fig. 155
Map description
The following information and function surfaces can be displayed in the
map. » Fig. 155
Vehicle position
Route
Function surfaces for card use » page 148
Function surface of the POI
Function surface for the POI list
Function surface for displaying a traffic incident » page 155
Information on the maximum permitted speed
Destination position
Intermediate destination position
Destination position
Home address
Favourite position
Information in the status line
Street name/street number of the current vehicle position
Distance to destination
Route to the stopover
Estimated travelling time to the destination
Estimated travelling time to the stopover
Estimated time of arrival at destination/stopover
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
140
Infotainment
Split screen
Fig. 156
Split screen
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Split screen
.
To select content of the split screen
A
» Fig. 156, tap on the function sur-
face
and select one of the following menus, depending on the context.
Audio
- Operation of
Radio
/
Media
playback
Compass
- Displays the current vehicle location in relation to the compass di-
rections
Most frequent routes
- Display the three most frequent routes (if guidance not
being carried out) » page 152
Manoeuvre
- Displays graphical driving recommendations (if route guidance is
enabled) » page 152
Position
- Displays the geographical coordinates of the current vehicle loca-
tion
Search for destination and enter
Selecting the type of destination search/destination entry
Fig. 157
Selecting the type of destina-
tion search/destination entry
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface .
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
Enter destination
.
Function surfaces » Fig. 157
Search for a destination or POI (point of interest) by name » page 141
Destination entry by address » page 142
Online POI search » page 141
Search for a point along the route (only works with active route guidance)
» page 141
Destination input via the map point or using the GPS coordinates
» page 143
Search for destination/POI
Fig. 158
Menu for the destination search
Fig. 159
List of destinations found: in the navigation data/online
The feature allows a full text search of locations or points of interest (POI) by
entering keywords.
A
B
C
D
E
141
Navigation
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface .
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface → Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface of one of the menu items for the destination
search
A
,
C
or
D
» Fig. 157 on page 141.
Function surfaces » Fig. 158 and » Fig. 159
Input line
Depending on the search mode, the following symbols are displayed
- Display of destinations found in the navigation database
- Display of destinations found online
- Select the destination search/destination entry » page 141
List of last destinations (if no character is entered) / List of visited destina-
tions
Keypad
Status of online services
Find destination
Enter the POI name or the POI category (POI) and, if required, the place and
street name or house number/postal code.
A list of the destinations found is displayed in area
D
» Fig. 158.
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
Or: tap function surface
B
» Fig. 158.
A map with the following symbols and a list of the destinations found is dis-
played.
Destinations found in the navigation data » Fig. 159 - .
Destinations found online » Fig. 159 - .
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Enter destination using the address
Fig. 160 Enter destination using the address: Main menu/list of places
found
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
→ Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface
B
» Fig. 157 on page 141.
Enter dest.
Enter the destination address and then confirm » Fig. 160 -
.
Tap the function surface

to see the destination details.
Relevant names (e.g. place/street names) are offered in the entry line during
entry, depending on the context. The location of the proposed destination can
be displayed by tapping the function surface
Map
.
Depending on the number of places visited, a map with a list of visited places
can be displayed automatically » Fig. 160 - .
The map with the list of visited locations can be accessed manually by tapping
the function surface .
142
Infotainment
Entering a destination via the map point and using GPS coordinates
Fig. 161 Enter destination: via the map point/using GPS coordinates
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
→ Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface
E
» Fig. 157 on page 141.
Enter destination via map point
Touch the screen to move the desired destination into the cross-hair
» Fig. 161 -
.
Tap the function surface

to see the destination details.
Entering the destination using coordinates
Tap in the values of the GPS coordinates one at a time and adjust » Fig. 161 -
,
Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
If information about the point entered is available in the Infotainment system's
navigation data, this will be displayed instead of the GPS coordinates (e.g. ad-
dress
A
» Fig. 161).
Entering a destination via the map point
Fig. 162
Menu after tapping the map
point
Tap on the map to display the symbol and a menu with the following menu
items (depending on the context) » Fig. 162.
Display the destination details » page 150
Display the POI details/display the list of POIs (function surface)
)
Start route guidance to the selected point
Paste the selected point into the current route guidance as the next des-
tination
Start route guidance to the favourite
Start route guidance to the home address
Destination search in the vicinity of the selected point » page 141
Define the starting point for demo mode (if it is turned on) » page 151
Find petrol station, restaurant or car park
Fig. 163
List of petrol stations found: in the navigation data/online
A
B
C
143
Navigation
Fig. 164 List of car parks found: in the navigation data/online
The Infotainment allows you to find petrol stations, restaurants or car parks
quickly in the navigation data as well as online.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
.
Tap the function surface of the desired category.
Or press the

button, and then tap on function surface
or
.
Find destination in the navigation data
Depending on the context below, a list of POIs from the selected category is
displayed.
No route guidance is taking place - The nearest destinations in a radius of
200 km from the current vehicle position are displayed.
Route guidance is taking place - Destinations on the route or near the route
are displayed.
Find destination online
When Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated, a list of POIs from
the selected category in a radius around the current vehicle position is dis-
played, regardless of whether or not route guidance is taking place.
After searching for a destination, you can switch between the list of destina-
tions found in the navigation data and the list of destinations found online by
tapping one of the following function surfaces at position
A
» Fig. 163 or
» Fig. 164.
Displays the list of destinations found in the navigation data.
Displays the list of destinations found online.
Note
With the
Fuel options
Select preferred fuel station
function activated, the pre-
ferred fuel stations are displayed in the first three positions during the fuel sta-
tion search.
Saved destinations
Last destinations
List of last destinations
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Last destinations
.
Details of the last destination
In the main Navigation menu, press the

button.
If route guide is not taking place, the details of the last destination to which
route guidance was carried out are displayed. If route guidance is taking
place, the details of the final destination are displayed.
Last destinations in the destination/POI search menu
In the destination search menu, a short list of last destinations is show in area
D
» Fig. 158 on page 141.
Function surfaces in the list of last destinations
- Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed when
there are more than 5 entries available)
- Display the details of the selected destination » page 150
Destination memory
Fig. 165 Select list of stored destinations/categories of stored destina-
tions
Find
144
Infotainment
Import custom destinations
Introduction to the subject
Fig. 166
MyDestination application on
the ŠKODA websites
Fig. 167
ŠKODA Connect websites
This chapter describes destinations which can be imported into the Infotain-
ment memory.
You can create custom destinations using the ŠKODA application
“MyDestination”, in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 166 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to display more information on the “MyDestination” application.
http://go.skoda.eu/my-destination
Access to the ŠKODA Connect Portal can be found on the ŠKODA Connect
website. You can open this by scanning the QR code » Fig. 167 or entering the
following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
Destinations in vCard format
In the Infotainment memory, you can import a custom destination in vCard
format (*.vcf) from an SD card or a USB source.
Import
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the file of the custom destination.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Import destinations (SD/USB)
.
Select the source and confirm the import.
Route guidance
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Find and select the desired imported destination.
Delete custom destination
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the function surface
Tap on the desired custom destination.
In the destination details, tap the function surface
Edit
Delete
and confirm
the deletion process.
POI categories created in the “MyDestination” application
Import/update
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the POI categories.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
.
If the same custom POI category name already exists in the Infotainment
memory, then it will be overwritten during the import.
Show POIs in the map
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Guidance to the POI
In the map, tap on the traffic obstruction symbol.
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 150.
146
Infotainment
Clear all custom POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
POI categories created in the user profile in the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal”
The custom POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website can be imported into the Infotainment memory.
The requirement for importing a POI category is that Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
Importing POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Online update
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface
.
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis-
played.
Tap the function surface
POIs
Retrieve
.
If new POI categories are available, their quantity and file size is displayed by
the Infotainment system.
Tap the function surface
Start
to start route guidance.
To complete the import, tap the function surface
Next
and confirm the im-
port.
Show POIs in the map
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Route guidance to a destination in the imported POI category
In the map, tap on the traffic obstruction symbol.
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 150.
Clear all custom POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
Destinations created in the user profile in the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal”
The destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website or in the ŠKODA Connect application can be imported into the Info-
tainment memory.
The requirement for importing the destinations is that Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
importing destinations
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface .
Tap on the function surface
Update
.
If new destinations are available, then confirm the import.
If a destination was created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website or in the ŠKODA Connect application and sent to the Infotainment
system, a message regarding a new destination will be displayed on the Info-
tainment screen after the ignition is switched on, with the option to import the
destination.
Route guidance to an online destination
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
In the list of online destinations, find and select the desired destination.
Deleting online destinations
To delete all online destinations go to the main Navigation menu and tap the
function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Online destinations
.
To delete one online destination, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on
function surface
Destinations
Edit
Delete
.
147
Navigation
Image with GPS coordinates
Fig. 168
Image with GPS coordinates
Infotainment enables guidance to the GPS coordinate data stored in the im-
age.
Press the

button then tap the function surface
Images
.
Select the connected source and open the image with GPS coordinates.
Tap the function surface
» Fig. 168 in the image and a menu will open with
the option to start route guidance.
The image can be obtained from an external device in which GPS coordinates
were stored at the time of image creation. This could be created in the
“MyDestination” application and imported » Fig. 166 on page 146.
Map
Map display options
Fig. 169
Map display options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
.
The following function surfaces are displayed » Fig. 169.
2D - Two-dimensional map display
3D - Three-dimensional map display
Display of the route from the current vehicle location to the destination
Display of the position of the destination or the next stopover on the map
(depending on the setting for menu item
Advanced settings
Status line:
)
Automatic map display in day or night mode (depending on the currently
active vehicle lighting)
Daytime map display
Night-time map display
Switch the split screen display on/off » page 141
Switch the display of selected POI categories on/off » page 143, Entering a
destination via the map point
If the map scale of the 2D or 3D display is greater than 10 km (5 miles), then
the map is automatically displayed as 2D and aligned in the direction of north.
If the scale is increased beyond this value, then the map is switched back to
the original representation.
Map scale
Fig. 170
Function surfaces for changing the map scale
It is possible to change the map scale manually or to activate the automatic
scale change.
Tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 170.
In area
B
» Fig. 170, function surfaces for changing the map scale are dis-
played.
A
B
C
D
E
148
Infotainment
Types of manual scale change
Touch the screen with two fingers and pull them apart or close them togeth-
er.
Press the control knob .
Activating automatic scale change
If the automatic scale is active, the map scale will change automatically de-
pending on the type of roads travelled (motorway - smaller map scale / town -
larger map scale) and the manoeuvre to be carried out.
To activate the automatic scale change, go to the main Navigation menu and
tap on function surface .
Tap the function surface is highlighted in green.
The automatic scale is only active as long as the map is centred on the vehicle
position (the function surface
is hidden).
To deactivate the automatic scale change, go to the main Navigation menu
and tap on function surface
.
The function surface
is highlighted in white.
The function is also deactivated when the map is moved or the map scale is
changed manually.
Map view in reduced scale
In the main Navigation menu, tap on function surface
A
.
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then restored.
Changing map orientation
Fig. 171
Changing the map orientation
You can change the map orientation under the following conditions.
The map is in the 2D display.
The map is centred (the function surface is hidden).
The map scale is max. 10 km.
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented to-
wards north.
You can only change the map orientation in the 2D display, provided the map is
centred on the vehicle position (the function surface is hidden » page 149,
Map centring).
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented to-
wards north.
To change the map orientation, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on
function surface
A
» Fig. 171.
The map is oriented to the north
The symbol
for the vehicle position rotates, the map and the polar star sym-
bol
do not rotate.
Map oriented to the direction of travel
The map and the Polar Star symbol
rotate, the vehicle position symbol
does not rotate.
Map centring
Fig. 172
Map centring
The moved map can be centred in the vehicle, destination or route position.
To centre the map, tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 172.
149
Navigation
POIs display
The Infotainment system offers the possibility of displaying POI symbols on
the map on the Infotainment screen.
To activate/deactivate the display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
POIs
.
To select the POIs to be displayed, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
Map
Select categories for POIs
and select the de-
sired categories (max. 10).
Road sign display
The Infotainment system offers the option of displaying the traffic signs stor-
ed in the navigation data or detected by the front camera during guidance on
the Infotainment screen
G
» Fig. 155 on page 140.
To activate/deactivate the road sign display, go to the main Navigation
menu and tap on the function surface
Map
Show road signs
.
For some vehicles it is possible to set an alert when exceeding the permitted
speed limited by a road sign.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Driver assistance
Speed warning:
.
When towing a trailer, we recommend that you activate recognition of road
signs relevant to trailers.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Driver assistance
Show
road signs relevant to trailers
.
Route guidance
Introduction to the subject
A route is created by starting route guidance to a destination. Additional stop-
overs can be added to the route.
Route guidance takes place as follows
Through graphical driving instructions on the Infotainment screen and in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Through navigation announcements.
The Infotainment system tries to allow for continued guidance even if the nav-
igation data is incomplete or there is no data at all for the given area.
The route is recalculated each time you ignore driving recommendations or
change the route.
CAUTION
The navigation announcements provided may vary from the actual situations,
e.g. due to out-of-date navigation data.
Destination details
Fig. 173
Details of: destination found in the navigation data/online
The following menu items and information are displayed in the destination de-
tails » Fig. 173.
Area with function surfaces
Detailed destination information
Destination position in the map
Detailed destination information (if available)
Status of online services
Display the destination details
The destination details can be displayed in one of the following ways.
While entering a destination.
By tapping on the function surface
in the destination list.
Press the

button in the main Navigation menu to display the details of
the last destination.
A
B
C
D
E
150
Infotainment
Function surfaces
Using the function surfaces in area
A
, the following functions can be per-
formed, depending on the context.
Start/stop route guidance.
Search for a nearby destination » page 141.
Set route options.
Store destination.
Edit destination (the destination can be deleted, renamed or saved as a fa-
vourite).
Dial the POI phone number (if the Infotainment system is connected to a
phone » page 126, Pairing and connecting).
Route calculation and starting route guidance
Fig. 174
Alternative routes
Routes are calculated based on the set route options. The route options can be
set:
Route options
.
Alternative routes
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the following menu is displayed
after calculation of a new route » Fig. 174.
- calculate the most economical route with the shortest driving time
and shortest distance travelled – the route is highlighted green
- calculate the fastest route to the destination, even if a detour is nec-
essary –the route is highlighted in red
- calculate the shortest route to the destination, even if a longer driving
time is required – the route is highlighted in orange
It is possible to select an already calculated alternative route before calculation
of the remaining routes is completed.
Selecting the type of route will start the route guidance.
A
B
C
If no route selection is made within 30 s of calculation of all routes, route guid-
ance will start automatically according to the preferred route type.
Route calculation for trailer towing
When driving with a trailer or any other accessory connected to the trailer
socket, we recommend that you switch on trailer recognition, if necessary, to
set the maximum speed for towing a trailer.
To calculate the route when driving with a trailer, go to the main Navigation
menu and tap the function surface
Route options
.
To set the maximum speed of the trailer, press the

button, then tap on
function surface
Driver assistance
Trailer recognition
Maximum speed for
trailer
.
Demo mode
Demo mode provides a driving simulation to the entered destination. The func-
tion allows you to travel through the calculated route “virtually”.
When Demo mode is turned on, a menu for route guidance in Demo mode or
in normal mode is displayed before route guidance starts.
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Advanced settings
Demo mode
.
When Demo mode is activated, the route starting point can be defined.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
Define demo mode starting point
.
Define the starting point by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
tion.
The demo mode starting point can also be set provided demo mode is turned
on by tapping on the desired map location and selecting the menu item
Start
Demo Mode
» page 143, Entering a destination via the map point.
151
Navigation
Graphical driving recommendations
Fig. 175 Driving recommendations/driving recommendation detail
The graphical driving recommendations are displayed in the
Manoeuvre
split
screen and in the instrument cluster display.
In the
Manoeuvre
split screen, the following driving recommendations are dis-
played » Fig. 175.
Street name/street number of the current vehicle position
Driving recommendations with street names/road numbers, the route and
the travel time to the manoeuvre location
Driving recommendation details (displayed near the manoeuvre)
Lane guidance
In the
Manoeuvre
split screen, the Infotainment system also draws your atten-
tion to traffic obstructions received via TMC, as well as to motorways, car
parks, petrol stations or restaurants.
Speed limits
With the
Advanced settings
Note: national border crossed
function activated,
the country-specific speed limits are displayed when you cross the national
border.
These speed limits can be displayed by tapping on function surface
Speed
limits
in the main Navigation menu.
Navigation announcements
The Infotainment system issues navigation announcements during route guid-
ance.
A
B
C
D
The navigation announcements are generated by the Infotainment system.
Flawless clarity of the message (e.g., road or city name) cannot always be guar-
anteed.
The last navigation announcement can be repeated in the main Navigation
menu by tapping on the function surface .
The timing of the navigation announcement is dependent on the type of road
and on the driving speed.
The type of navigation announcements can be set:
Navigation announcements
.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Most frequent routes
The most frequently travelled routes are automatically saved by Infotainment.
Of these, up to 3 routes can be offered, which best match the current time,
day of the week as well as the vehicle position.
Route guidance to one of the routes used most frequently can be started pro-
vided route guidance is not currently active.
To display the menu with the most frequently travelled routes, go to the split
screen and tap on the function surface
Most frequent routes
Show on map
.
Select the desired route.
The selected route is then calculated and route guidance starts.
The menu display in the split screen can be activated/deactivated in the main
Navigation menu by tapping the function surface
Route options
Most fre-
quent routes
switched on/off.
The stored most frequent routes can be deleted in the main Navigation menu
by tapping the function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Most fre-
quent routes
deleted.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
152
Infotainment
Finish route guidance
Route guidance can be finished in one of the following ways.
The final destination is reached.
In the main Navigation menu by tapping the function surface
Stop route
guidance
.
By turning off the ignition for longer than 120 minutes.
Abort route guidance
If the ignition is switched off and on again, then route guidance is continued in
one of the following ways, depending on the stop time.
Within 15 minutes - route guidance continues, taking the calculated route in-
to account.
From 15 minutes to 120 minutes - after confirming the message on the Info-
tainment screen, the route guidance continues, taking the calculated route
into account.
After 120 min - route guidance is cancelled.
Route
Route details
Fig. 176 Route details: a route destination/several route destinations
During route guidance, the Route details (information about the current route)
can be displayed.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Route details
.
One route destination
In the route details, the following information is displayed at the destination
» Fig. 176 - .
Area with function surfaces
Destination information
Estimated time of arrival at destination/remaining driving time to desti-
nation
Remaining distance to the destination
Chosen route type (economic, fastest, shortest)
Current vehicle position (address/GPS coordinates)
You can adjust the display of the arrival time or the remaining driving time as
follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
Time display:
.
Several route destinations
In the route details, the following information is displayed at the respective
destinations » Fig. 176 -
.
Area with function surfaces
Stopover (with sequential number)
Final destination
Estimated time of arrival at destination/stopover
Driving distance to destination/stopover
Change positions of the destinations with each other
Delete the destination
Continuation of the route guidance from the selected target (previous
stopovers are skipped)
Display the destination details » page 150
Insert destination into the route
In the area
A
, tap on the function surface
Enter destination
and enter a new
destination.
or: In area
A
, tap the function surface
Destinations
and select a destination
from the list of stored destinations.
Each additional destination is added to the list as the first subsequent destina-
tion route.
A
B
C
D
A
153
Navigation
Change positions of destinations with each other
Press and hold the relevant function surface and move the destination to
the desired position.
For destinations already reached on the route, the note
Destination reached
is dis-
played below the destination name. It is no longer possible to change the posi-
tion of these destinations with each other.
Store route
In area
A
, tap the function surface
Store
.
Save the edited route as a new route or replace the existing saved route.
The route is stored in the route list » page 154.
Stop route guidance
In area
A
, tap the function surface
Stop
.
Route list
In the route list, it is possible to create, import, save or delete routes or start
navigation.
New route
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Routes
New route
.
Insert a route destination in one of the following ways.
Tap on the function surface
Enter destination
and enter a new destination.
or: Tap the function surface
Destinations
and select a destination from the list
of stored destinations.
To save the created route, tap the function surface
Store
.
To start route guidance, tap the function surface
Start
.
Route import
A prerequisite for importing the route is that the Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
A route that has been created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website and sent to the Infotainment system can be imported into the Info-
tainment memory even before switching on the ignition.
If the route was created when the ignition was switched on and sent to Info-
tainment, Infotainment is not imported until after switching off (for at least 15
minutes) and after switching the ignition back on again.
Switch on the ignition. When a new route is available, a message regarding
the option to import this route appears in the Infotainment screen automati-
cally.
If the user opts not to import the route immediately, the route can be impor-
ted manually later, as follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Routes
to check if
a new route is available.
Or press the

button, then tap on function surface .
Tap the function surface
Import routes
.
If a new route is available, a message will be displayed by the Infotainment sys-
tem.
Tap the function surface
Retrieve
to start route guidance.
After being successfully imported, the route is displayed in the list of saved
routes.
Managing saved routes
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Routes
.
Choose the desired route, and then select one of the following functions.
- delete the stored route
- Edit the route » page 153, Route details
- Calculate the route and start route guidance » page 151, Route calcula-
tion and starting route guidance
Traffic reports
List of traffic reports
Fig. 177
List of traffic reports
Delete
Edit
Start
154
Infotainment
The Infotainment system enables the reception of traffic reports, which in-
clude information regarding traffic congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message
Channel) or online (when Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated).
To display the list of traffic reports, press the

button then tap the func-
tion surface .
In the list of traffic messages and the map, a max. of 6 messages are displayed,
that are provided with a letter and a traffic obstruction symbol (e.g. , , )
A
» Fig. 177.
The traffic reports available on the route are indicated by a navigation an-
nouncement.
Source of traffic information
At position
C
» Fig. 177, the following symbols can be displayed.
TMC Traffic Information (when the symbol is crossed out, the Infotain-
ment system is out of range of any traffic information provider)
Online traffic report
Display options
Route guidance is not taking place - All traffic messages are displayed.
Route guidance is taking place - After tapping function surface
B
» Fig. 177
in the displayed menu, you can select all traffic messages by tapping the
function surface
All areas
, or you can select only the traffic messages present
on the route by tapping the function surface
Route
.
A traffic report may contain some of the following information.
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Number of the road affected
Name of the location affected
Description of the traffic obstruction
Colour differentiation of the importance of the traffic obstruction in a TMC
message
The symbol for the traffic obstruction (e.g. , , ) precedes the obstruction
and the length of the obstruction is shown in the map on the right along the
route.
Depending on the context, the symbol for the obstruction is displayed in one
of the following ways.
No route guidance is taking place
Red - All traffic obstructions

Route guidance is not taking place
Grey - The traffic obstruction is not on the route
Red - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will not be recalcula-
ted and the route passes through the traffic obstruction
Orange - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will be recalcula-
ted and an alternative route is available
Colour differentiation of the importance of a traffic obstruction from an
online message
The colour differentiation of traffic obstructions is dependent on the provider
of the online traffic reports.
To set the traffic obstructions display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
the function surface → Tap on
Map
Traffic flow settings
.
Update
The list of traffic reports is continuously updated by the Infotainment system.
Details of the traffic report
Fig. 178
Details of the traffic report
The detail of the traffic message depends on the source of the traffic mes-
sage.
To display this, select the desired traffic report from the list of traffic re-
ports.
or: Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
Depending on the context, the following information and function surfaces are
displayed » Fig. 178.
Map of the affected location
Description of the traffic obstruction
A
B
155
Navigation
The time of arrival and information relating to the traffic report provider
(if ŠKODA Connect is the provider, it is an online traffic report)
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Length of the traffic obstruction
Dynamic route
The Infotainment system allows an evaluation of the traffic reports received
during the route guidance. If the following conditions are met, a bypass route
is calculated and the appropriate announcement is issued.
The dynamic route function is turned on.
The traffic obstruction included in the traffic information is on the route.
The traffic obstruction is evaluated by the Infotainment system as being
significant.
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Route options
Dynamic route
.
Entering/removing a traffic obstruction on the route manually
If a traffic obstruction is detected during route guidance (e.g. traffic jam), this
traffic obstruction can be entered into the route manually.
Once entered, the Infotainment system recalculates and provides an alterna-
tive route.
Enter traffic obstruction
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Congestion ahead
.
Adjust the length of the traffic obstruction.
The traffic obstruction is displayed in red in the map to the right along the
route.
Remove traffic obstruction
The traffic obstruction is removed from the route after completion of the
route guidance or can manually be removed as follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Delete "congest.
ahead"
.
C
D
E
Vehicle systems
CAR - Vehicle settings
Introduction to the subject
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
In the CAR menu, you can display driving data and vehicle information and can
configure some vehicle systems.
Reset to factory settings
You can reset the factory settings in the Infotainment system in menu

Factory settings
.
Note
Settings relating to the vehicle systems can only be made when the ignition is
switched on.
Main menu
Fig. 179
Function surfaces in the main
menu
Press the

button to display the main menu with the following function
surfaces » Fig. 179.
Select the following menu points
Journey data
DriveGreen
Vehicle status
Operating playback - Radio/Media
Operating heated windscreen
Vehicle system settings

156
Infotainment
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Introduction
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
While driving with the engine stopped the ignition must always be
switched on. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident!
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 161, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock -
danger of an accident!
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
risk of theft etc!
Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in an enclosed place - there is the
danger of poisoning and death!
CAUTION
Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
Do not push-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic
converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid.
On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is loca-
ted. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally
left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key!
Note
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. This helps the engine to reach
its operating temperature faster.
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Read and observe and on page 157 first.
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the
theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult.
Immobiliser
The immobilizer allows the engine to be started only with the original car key.
Malfunction of the immobiliser
If the immobiliser in the key fails, it is not possible to start the engine. A corre-
sponding message appears in the display of the instrument cluster to explain
the immobiliser is active.
To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
Steering lock - lock
On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driv-
er's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off after-
wards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
locked.
Steering lock - unlock
On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
ignition. If this is not possible, then move the steering wheel slightly back and
forth, as a result of which the steering lock should unlock.
On vehicles with starter button, get into the vehicle and close the driver's
door. Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only
when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
WARNING
Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - risk of accident!
157
Starting-off and Driving
Switching the ignition on/off
Fig. 180 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button
Read and observe and on page 157 first.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 180 -
Ignition switched off, engine switched off
Ignition switched on
Starting engine
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button
Press the» Fig. 180 -
button, the ignition is turned on / off.
On vehicles with manual transmission, the pedal must not be depressed to
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de-
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting/Stopping the engine
Read and observe and on page 157 first.
Before starting the engine
Firmly apply the handbrake.
For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
1
2
3
Starting the engine
On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position
3
and the engine
starts» Fig. 180 on page 158 . Then release the key, the engine will start au-
tomatically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position
1
. Re-
peat the start-up process after 30 s.
On vehicles withstarter button, press the button briefly» Fig. 180 on
page 158 - , the motor will start automatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning lights up after the
ignition is switched on. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes
out.
Switching the engine off
Stop the vehicle.
On vehicles withignition lock, turn the key to position
1
» Fig. 180 on
page 158
.
On vehicles withstarter button, press the button» Fig. 180 on page 158 -
the engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P.
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey if the en-
gine has been working at high revs over a prolonged period, but leave it to run
at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation
of heat when the engine is switched off.
Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
Keep the button pressed down» Fig. 180 on page 158 - or press it twice
within 1 second.
After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
locked.
CAUTION
When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
ing a vehicle with automatic transmission must always be in P mode.
158
Driving
Note
The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start-
ing the cold engine.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may (also intermittently)
continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Problems with starting the engine - Vehicles with starter button
Fig. 181
Starting the engine - Press the
button with the key
Read and observe and on page 157 first.
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a sys-
tem fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
Press the starter button with the key » Fig. 181.
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required.
CAUTION
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running
out of charge or the signal fails (strong electromagnetic field) or is shielded
(e.g. in an aluminium case).
START-STOP system
Introduction
The START STOPsystem (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces
CO
2
emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel.
If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
(e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it again when mov-
ing off.
The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the
driver, the others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified.
Therefore the system may react differently in situations which seem identi-
cal from the driver's perspective.
The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
(even where this has previously been manually deactivated with the button ).
Note
If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains on.
functionality
Fig. 182
Display
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released.
The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a halt
and the brake pedal is operated.
The engine is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released.
Requirements for the system to function correctly
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly.
The driver's door is closed.
The driver has fastened the seat belt.
159
Starting-off and Driving
The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
System status
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt
» Fig. 182.
The engine is automatically switched off; when the vehicle moves off the
ignition process will be automatically initiated.
The engine is not automatically switched off.
The engine does not shut down when the vehicle stops, if e.g. the following
applies.
The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
The current consumption is too high.
High air conditioning or heating output (high fan speed, big difference be-
tween the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine has shut down automatically but the system detects that the en-
gine is required to run (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly) then the
system automatically starts up the engine.
More information about the current system status can be displayed in the In-
fotainment screen, in the

Vehicle status
menu.
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will
have to be restarted manually.
No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
angle.
Deactivate/activate the system manually
Fig. 183
Button for the START-STOP sys-
tem
To deactivate/activate the system, press the button » Fig. 183.
When the system is deactivated, the symbol
in the button lights up.
If the system is turned off, it will be automatically reactivated after turning the
ignition off and on.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
Braking and parking
Introduction
The wear and tear on the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions
and driving style. In difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving), the condi-
tion of the brakes should be checked between services by a specialist garage.
Brake response can be slower if the brakes are covered in moisture or, in
winter, have a layer of ice or salt on them. The brakes should be cleaned and
dried by applying the brakes many times over »
.
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads can occur if the vehi-
cle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the
braking system. The brakes should be cleaned by applying the brakes several
times over » .
160
Driving
Before negotiating a long or steep gradient, reduce speed and shift down a
gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the
load on the brakes. If, nevertheless, there is a need for additional braking, it
should be carried out at intervals.
Emergency braking warning - if it is necessary to brake hard, the system may
cause the brake lights to automatically flash, to alert the traffic behind.
New brake pads must first be ““run in”” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
If the brake fluid level is too low, it can cause faults in the braking system;
the warning light will illuminate in the instrument cluster » page 38, Brak-
ing system. If the warning light does not light up, yet the stopping distance is
perceived to be longer than before, the driving style should be adapted in view
of the unknown cause of the problem, and braking kept to a minimum - seek
the help of a specialist garage without delay.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident!
The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with manual
transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise, the
functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident!
Do not depress the brake pedal, if there is no requirement to slow down.
This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking
distance and excessive wear - risk of accident!
Only brake for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the
traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
Recommendations for new brake pads should be followed.
When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied
firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - risk of accident!
If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
Otherwise, the front brakes could be in danger of overheating – risk of ac-
cident!
Handbrake
Fig. 184
Handbrake
Read and observe on page 161 first.
The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stop-
ping and parking.
Apply
Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Release
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 184.
Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning light
lights up when the handbrake is applied, provi-
ded the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand-
brake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a
speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially
disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a nega-
tive effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident!
Parking
Read and observe on page 161 first.
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
161
Starting-off and Driving
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order.
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with Manual transmission, select 1st gear or Reverse gear R.
Release the brake pedal.
WARNING
The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never
stop the vehicle in places where the underside of your vehicle could come
into contact with flammable materials (e.g. dry grass, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like). - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people unattended in the car who
could, for example, lock the vehicle or release the brake - risk of accidents
and injury!
Manual gear changing and pedals
Introduction
CAUTION
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Manual gear changing
Fig. 185
The shift pattern
Read and observe on page 162 first.
On the gear lever, the shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown
» Fig. 185.
The gearshift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 47.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
to the clutch.
Engaging reverse gear
Stop the vehicle.
The clutch pedal must be fully depressed.
Switch the gear lever to N.
Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into R
» Fig. 185.
The reversing lights will come on once the reverse gear is engaged, provided
the ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear shift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gear shift mech-
anism to wear excessively.
Pedals
Read and observe on page 162 first.
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
Only a floor mat (ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range)
which can be secured to the attachment points should be used in the driver's
footwell.
WARNING
There should be no objects in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal op-
eration can be impeded - risk of accident!
162
Driving
Automatic transmission
Introduction
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective
of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
WARNING
Do not accelerate when selecting drive mode prior to moving off - risk of
accident!
Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
dent!
If the vehicle stalls, with engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic mode,
then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of the
brake pedal, parking brake or using the Auto Hold function. Even when the
engine is idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted –
the vehicle crawls forward.
When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle could be set in motion - risk of accident!
CAUTION
If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S
whilst driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Select selector lever position
Fig. 186
Selector lever settings / display
Read and observe and on page 163 first.
The selector lever can be moved through shifting to one of the following posi-
tions » Fig. 186. In some positions you have to push the locking button
» page 164, Selector lever lock.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 186.
Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
Reverse gear - the position can only be selected when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the engine is idling.
Neutral (idle position) - power transmission to the drive wheels is inter-
rupted.
Forward mode / sports programme - the gear change takes place in the
position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
(Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S
In mode D or S, the forward gears are shifted automatically depending on the
engine load, the operation of the accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed, and the
selected driving mode .
P
R
N
D/S
163
Starting-off and Driving
Selector lever lock
Fig. 187
Shift lock button
Read and observe and on page 163 first.
The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel
mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light
.
Disengage selector lever from P mode or N
Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, push the lock button in the di-
rection of arrow
1
» Fig. 187.
To move the selector lever from mode N to D/S only the brake pedal is press-
ed.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed.
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man-
ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 219.
Note
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver-
sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being ac-
cidentally selected.
Manual shifting (Tiptronic)
Fig. 188
Selector lever
Read and observe and on page 163 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever.
This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving.
Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right-
hand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained.
Gear changing
To change up, tap the selector lever forwards
+
» Fig. 188.
To change down, tap the selector lever backwards
-
» Fig. 188.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the » Fig. 186 on page 163 display.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 47.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
over revving.
Note
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual shift-
ing of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence
the wear of the brakes.
164
Driving
Start and drive
Read and observe and on page 163 first.
Moving off and pausing temporarily
Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
Start the engine.
Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position
» page 163.
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time (e.g. at a crossroads). However, the brake pedal should be de-
pressed, in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Accelerate to max. speed during the journey (kickdown function)
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is in forward drive mode,
the kick-down function is turned on.
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to achieve maximum acceleration.
WARNING
Rapid acceleration ( e.g. on slippery roads) can lead to a loss of control over
the vehicle – risk of accident!
Running in and economical driving
Run in engine
During the first 1,500 km, the driving style is decisive for the success of the
running in process.
During the first 1,000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer.
From about 1,000 to 1,500 km, the engine can be pushed up to the maximum
permitted engine speed.
Tips on economical driving
Fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road and weather conditions,
and similar such factors.
For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Engage the recommended gear » page 47.
Avoid full throttle and high speeds.
Reduce idling.
Avoid short distances.
Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained » page 205.
Avoid unnecessary ballast.
Remove the roof rack before driving if it is not needed.
Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as necessary.
Briefly ventilate before turning on the cooling system, do not use the cooling
system with the windows open.
Do not leave windows open at high speeds.
Drive Green function
Fig. 189
Display on Infotainment screen
The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the
driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style.
DriveGreen can be displayed on the Infotainment as follows.
Press the

button in Infotainment and then tap on the
DriveGreen
function surfaces in the display.
A
driving liquid display
When the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking.
B
“Green leaf”
The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi-
cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com-
pletely hidden.
165
Starting-off and Driving
C
bar graph
The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar
shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left.
D
scoring (0 - 100)
The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When
you tap the function surface
D
, a detailed assessment showing the driving ef-
ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green).
E
the average fuel consumption from the start
When you tap the
E
function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the
bars are shown in dark green).
F
symbols
The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on
the current driving style.
Economical driving style
The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
The journey does not take place in a free-flowing manner, avoid unneces-
sary acceleration and braking
Recommended gear
Tips for economical driving
Tap on the
B
leaf to display tips for economical driving.
Note
When resetting the single-trip memory “Since start”, the average consumption
E
, the driving assessment
D
, and the diagram
C
are also reset.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Driving Tips
Only drive on roads and terrain that are appropriate to the vehicle parameters
» page 230, Technical data.

The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can cope
with the conditions and the terrain.
WARNING
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
CAUTION
Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. to parts of
the fuel or brake system).
Driving through water
Fig. 190
Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through water.
The water level must not go above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 190.
Drive at no more than walking pace, otherwise a wave may form in front of
the vehicle, which could cause the water to enter into the vehicle’s systems
(e.g. the air intake system for the engine).
Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
166
Driving
CAUTION
If water gets into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the en-
gine) it can cause serious damage to the vehicle!
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.
Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
ter.
Assist systems
General information
Introduction
WARNING
The assistance systems only serve to support and do not relieve the driv-
er of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec-
tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks -
risk of accident!
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For
this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system
responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and
ready to intervene!
Only enable, disable or set the assistance systems so that you have the
vehicle fully under control in every traffic situation - risk of accident!
Radar sensor
Fig. 191
Installation location of the radar
sensor
Read and observe on page 167 first.
The radar sensor (hereinafter on referred to as sensor) uses electromagnetic
waves to capture the traffic situation ahead of the vehicle » Fig. 191.
The sensor is part of the Front Assist system » page 177.
167
Assist systems
The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following.
The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow and the like).
The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights and the like).
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
If the sensor is covered or dirty, the corresponding message from the Front
Assist system appears in the instrument cluster display » page 179, Malfunc-
tions.
WARNING
If you suspect that the sensor has been damaged, deactivate Front Assist
» page 179. Have the sensor checked by a specialist garage.
A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect
the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can
lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accidents!
CAUTION
Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent-free de-icer.
Braking and stabilisation systems
Introduction
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
The error display is in Chapter » page 37, Warning lights.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
Stability Control (ESC)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle
starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the direction.
If there is an ESC intervention, the warning light flashes in the instrument
cluster.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
An ABS intervention can be noticed through pulsating movements of the
brake pedal and distinct noises.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
MSR counteracts the tendency of the drive wheels to lock during downshifts
or sudden deceleration (e.g. on icy or an otherwise slippery road surface).
If the drive wheels should lock, then the engine speed is automatically in-
creased. This reduces the braking effect of the engine and the wheels can ro-
tate freely again.
Traction control (TCS)
Fig. 192
Button for the TCS system:
Read and observe on page 168 first.
The TCS prevents the drive wheels from spinning. TCS reduces the drive pow-
er transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for example,
driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier.
168
Driving
During a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument clus-
ter.
Deactivation
Press the » Fig. 192 button.
or: In Infotainment, press the

button, then tap the function surface
ESC system:
ASR off
.
With deactivation, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and
an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activation
Press the » Fig. 192 button.
or: In Infotainment, press the

button, then tap the function surface
ESC system:
Activated
.
With activation, the warning light
is extinguished and an appropriate mes-
sage is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
When driving with snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes a spinning wheel if required and transfers the drive power force to the
other drive wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
on the brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down,
there is an automatic re-activation of EDL.
Brake Assist (HBA)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis-
tance.
The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order
to achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap-
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re-
leased.
Hill Start Assist
Read and observe on page 168 first.
When driving on slopes, Hill Start Assist (hereinafter referred to simply as the
system) allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill on its own.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the
brake pedal.
The system is active as of a 5% slope, if the driver door is closed. The system is
only ever active on slopes when starting off in forward or reverse.
Multicollision brake (MCB)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking
interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent
crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi-
tions are met.
There was a front, side and rear-end collision of a certain severity.
The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h.
The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function-
al after impact.
The accelerator pedal is not actuated.
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA)
Read and observe on page 168 first.
The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways and
then the whole trailer combination.
169
Assist systems
TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the
rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
genuine accessories.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
The TCS is activated.
The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
Further information » page 182, Towing device and trailer.
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
Introduction
The parking aid (hereinafter simply referred to as the system) uses acoustic
signals on the Infotainment screen when manoeuvring around obstacles in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be recognised by the system sen-
sors.
Before reversing, make sure that there are no small obstacles, such as
rocks, thin posts, etc., in front of or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles
may not be recognised by the system sensors.
CAUTION
Keep the system sensors » Fig. 193 on page 171 clean and free from snow
and ice, and do not cover them with any objects of any kind, otherwise the
functioning of the system may be restricted.
In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
temperatures, etc.), the functioning of the system may be impaired - “incorrect
recognition of obstacles”.
Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
can impair the system function.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Parking and
manoeuvring
.
ParkPilot – Settings for the parking aid
Activate automatically
– Activate/deactivate the compact parking aid display
(when driving forward)
Front volume
– Adjust the volume of the beeps for obstacle detection in front
Front tone setting
– Setting the pitch of the beeps for obstacle detection in
front
Rear volume
– Set the volume level of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Rear tone setting
– Setting the pitch of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Entertainment fading while parking
– Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) with activated parking aid
170
Driving
Operation
Fig. 193 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehi-
cle: front/rear
Fig. 194
Sampled areas and range of the
sensors
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 193.
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions are possible
» Fig. 194.
Variant 1: warns of obstacles in areas
C
,
D
.
Variant 2: warns of obstacles in areas
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
.
Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
Area » Fig. 194 Variant 1
(3 sensors)
Variant 2
(7 sensors)
A
- 120
B
- 60
C
160 160
D
60 60
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound -
danger area.
The acoustic signals can be set in the Infotainment system » page 170.
Towing a trailer
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only areas
A
and
B
» Fig. 194 are active in the system.
Note
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
Display Infotainment screen
Fig. 195
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 195
A
Road display.
171
Assist systems
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
play.
Switching audible parking signals on/off.
Change to rear-view camera display.
There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle
is less than 30 cm). Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great-
er than 30 cm).
An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta-
cle is greater than 30 cm).
System failure (there is no indication of obstacles).
Road display
The road display
A
» Fig. 195 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
road display is at the front.
Activation / deactivation
Fig. 196
System key (option 2)
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
Activation
The system is activated when the reverse gear is engaged, or, in vehicles with
variant 2, also by pressing the button » Fig. 196.
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button.
Deactivation
On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of
reverse gear.
For vehicles with variant 2, the system is automatically deactivated by press-
ing the button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the symbol in the button
goes out).
Displaying an error
If a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds after activating the system and there
is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is also
indicated by the symbol flashing in the button. Seek help from a specialist
garage.
Note
The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15
km/h.
Automatic system activation when moving forward
Fig. 197
Infotainment screen: Display
with automatic activation
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be-
low 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment
screen » Fig. 197.
Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
50 cm.
The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in the Infotainment sys-
tem » page 170.
172
Driving
Reversing camera
Introduction
The reversing camera (hereinafter the system) helps the driver to park and ma-
noeuvre the vehicle by displaying the area behind the vehicle on the Infotain-
ment screen (hereinafter only referred to as the screen).
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func-
tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For informa-
tion on cleaning » page 192.
CAUTION
The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the
screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to vehicles be-
hind.
Some items, such as narrow columns, chain link fences or lattice, may not be
represented adequately in terms of screen resolution.
In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
rage.
Note
The camera can be equipped with a cleaning system » page 67. The spraying is
carried out automatically when the rear window is sprayed.
Operation
Fig. 198 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the
vehicle
Read and observe
and on page 173 first.
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the boot lid handle
» Fig. 198.
Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 198
Detection range of the camera
Area outside the detection range of the camera
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol-
lowing basic conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
Reverse gear is engaged.
The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
Note
The screen display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol button
» Fig. 196 on page 172.
After disengaging reverse gear, automatic screen display of the parking aid is
carried out (variant 2, 3) » page 171.
A
B
173
Assist systems
Guidelines and function surfaces
Fig. 199 Infotainment screen: orientation lines/function surfaces
Read and observe and on page 173 first.
On the screen, orientation lines are shown along with the monitored area be-
hind the vehicle.
Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » Fig. 199
The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
The distance is about 100 cm.
The distance is about 200 cm.
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
road inclination.
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
width including mirrors.
Function surfaces » Fig. 199
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switches off the display of the
area behind the vehicle
Screen settings – brightness, contrast, colour
Switching on/off audible parking signals
Switching on/off the reduced park assistance display
Change to park assistance display
CAUTION
The objects shown on the screen can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
A
B
C
When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Cruise Control System
Introduction
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is
referred to hereinafter as the control.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-
ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is
continued.
Operation
Fig. 200
MAXI DOT display (monochromatic): Examples of CCS status
displays
174
Driving
Fig. 201 Segment display: Examples of CCS status displays
Read and observe on page 174 first.
CCS status displays » Fig. 200, » Fig. 201
Speed set, but control is inactive.
Control is active.
No speed set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for starting the control
The CCS is activated.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is en-
gaged.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the
D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
The current speed is higher than 20 km/h.
This, however, is only possible to the extent permitted by the engine output
and braking power of the vehicle.
WARNING
If the engine output or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the
set speed, the driver must assume control of the accelerator and brake
pedals!
Operation description
Fig. 202
Cruise control system controls
Read and observe on page 174 first.
Overview of the CCS controls » Fig. 202
A
 Activate CCS (control deactivated)
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ Increase speed
C
 Start control / reduce speed
D
 Switching between CCS and speed limiter
a)
If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
Once the controls are activated, the CCS maintains the vehicle at the set
speed; the warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Controls are automatically interrupted if any of the following occur.
The brake pedal is operated.
When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
Through an airbag deployment.
By pressing button
D
» Fig. 202.
WARNING
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
The control does not resume if the set speed is too high for the existing
traffic conditions.
175
Assist systems
Note
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
By pressing the button
D
» Fig. 202 during the control procedure this is can-
celled and the Speed Limiter is activated.
Speed limiter
Introduction
The speed limiter limits the maximum driving speed to the set speed limit.
The speed limit can only be exceeded by depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
The condition in which the speed limiter prevents a set speed limit from being
exceeded is referred to hereinafter as Regulation.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
Operation
Fig. 203 MAXI DOT display (monochromatic): Examples of speed limiter
status displays
Fig. 204 Segment display: Examples of speed limiter status displays
Read and observe on page 176 first.
Speed limiter status displays » Fig. 203, » Fig. 204
Speed limit set, but regulation is inactive.
Control is active.
No speed limit set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for start of control
The speed limiter is activated.
The current speed is higher than 30 km/h.
176
Driving
Description of operation
Fig. 205
Operating elements of the
speed limiter
Read and observe on page 176 first.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 205
A
 Activate CCS (required condition for the subsequent activation of
the speed limiter)
To activate the speed limiter, the switch must be adjusted to posi-
tion , then press
D
to operate.
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Deactivate speed limiter (set limit delete)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ increase speed - press (in increments of 1
km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C
 Start regulation / reduce speed - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
D
 Switching between CCS and speed limiter
a)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
After starting the system, the current speed is set as the speed limit, the warn-
ing light lights up in the instrument cluster.
Exceeding the speed limit during the regulation
If, during the control, it is necessary to exceed the speed limit (e.g. to over-
take), the accelerator pedal must be pressed fully.
When exceeding the speed limit (e.g. driving down a hill), an acoustic signal
sounds and the warning light flashes in the instrument cluster.
The regulation is resumed once the speed has fallen below the set limit.
Note
By pressing the button
D
during the regulation this is cancelled and the CCS is
activated.
Front Assist
Introduction
The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) warns you of the danger
of a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and tries
to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the
brakes where necessary.
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor» page 167.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
The system does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
CAUTION
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Driver assis-
tance
.
Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) – Set the assist system for dis-
tance monitoring to the vehicles ahead
Active
– Activate/deactivate the assis system
Advance warning
- Activate/deactivate and set the distance level at which a
warning occurs
Display distance warning
- Activate/deactivate distance warnings
177
Assist systems
Operation
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.
Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
Warns you of an impending collision.
Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, an automatic braking ac-
tion is performed.
The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
The system is activated.
TCS is activated » page 168.
The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.
Note
The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 168.
Distance warning
Fig. 206
Instrument cluster display: distance warning
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The display of the distance warning is for vehicles with MAXI DOT display.
If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is undershot, the warning light ap-
pears in the display » Fig. 206.
Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows
you to do so!
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed.
The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h.
Warning and automatic braking
Fig. 207
Instrument cluster display: Warning or emergency
braking at low speed
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Emergency braking at low speed
If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 30
km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
With automatic braking, the warning light
» Fig. 207 appears in the display.
Advance warning
If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light
» Fig. 207 appears
in the display and you will hear an acoustic signal.
The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations.
If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle at a driving speed range
of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 210 km/h.
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle at a driving speed
range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 85 km/h.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is
to be avoided!
Acute alert
If the driver does not react to the advance warning when in danger of a colli-
sion with a moving obstacle, the system briefly applies the brake automatically
via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a
collision again.
Automatic Braking
If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to auto-
matically brake the vehicle.
178
Driving
If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by steering intervention.
Brake assist
If the driver brakes inadequate with an impending collision, the system auto-
matically increases braking force.
The braking assistance only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly
pressed down.
Deactivation/activation
Fig. 208
Buttons/dial: on the operating lever/the multifunction steering
wheel
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » .
On vehicles with the MAXI DOT display, the system can be activated/deactiva-
ted in the main menu » page 51, Menu item
Assist systems
.
Deactivation / activation in vehicles with segment display
Button
» Fig. 208
Action Operation
A
Hold up / down Show Front Assist menu item
B
Press Deactivate/activate system
Deactivation / activation in vehicles with multi-function steering wheel
Button /
dial
» Fig. 208
Action Operation
C
Press Show Front Assist menu item
D
Press Deactivate/activate system
Disable / enable and setting in the Infotainment
In Infotainment, the entire system or the function advance warning and dis-
tance warning can be deactivated/activated» page 177, Settings in Infotain-
ment.
If the distance-warning function was deactivated before switching off the ig-
nition, it remains deactivated after switching on the ignition.
WARNING
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety
reasons.
When the vehicle is being towed away.
When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench.
If an unfounded warning or a system action was taken.
When on a truck, or a vehicle ferry service or similar.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
view appears. Clean the sensor cover or remove the obstacle » Fig. 191 on
page 167.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system
still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
179
Assist systems
Fatigue detection system
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter simply the system) advises the driv-
er to take a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on
the driver's steering behaviour.
The system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds of 65-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The system can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment menu

Driv-
er assistance
.
Pause recommendation
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display
of the instrument cluster
and a message about the detected fatigue. An au-
dible signal is also emitted.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired.
The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
Note
In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behaviour incorrect-
ly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.
The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Tyre pressure monitoring
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to as the system)
monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal is heard » page 41.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system, if one of the fol-
lowing events occurs.
Change of tyre inflation pressure.
Change one or more wheels.
Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
The warning light
in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 167, in section Introduction.
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 205.
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified
inflation pressure » page 205. When storing incorrect pressure values, the
system could possibly not issue any warnings, even with a too low tyre
pressure.
CAUTION
To ensure proper system function, the tyre pressure values must be stored ev-
ery 10,000 km or 1x a year.
180
Driving
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display
Fig. 209
Button for storing the pressure
values/example of the screen
display: the system indicates a
tyre pressure change at the
front right-hand side
Read and observe and on page 180 first.
Procedure for storing the tyre pressure values
Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Tap →
Vehicle
status
.
Use the function surfaces
to select menu item Tyre Pressure Loss Indica-
tor.
Tap the function surface

» Fig. 209.
In addition, follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
A message on the screen informs you about the storage of the tyre pressure
values.
Note
When a warning light in the instrument cluster appears, the affected tyre
can be displayed on the infotainment » Fig. 209.
Storing the tyre pressure values by means of the key
Fig. 210
Key for storing the pressure val-
ues
Read and observe and on page 180 first.
Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
Switch on the ignition.
Press the symbol button
» Fig. 210 on the button and hold.
The warning light
in the instrument cluster illuminates.
An acoustic signal sounds and the warning light goes out, indicating that the
tyre pressure values have been stored.
Release the symbol key
.
181
Assist systems
Towing device and trailer
Hitch
Introduction
The maximum trailer load is dependent on the engine and the vehicle equip-
ment. The valid specification for your vehicle can be found in the technical ve-
hicle documentation, the declaration of conformity (the so-called COC docu-
ment) or at a ŠKODA partner.
Other information (e.g. on the nameplate of the towing device) provide infor-
mation only about the test values of the device.
WARNING
Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting
recess before the start of every journey.
When the ball rod is not properly secured in the receiving shaft, it could
be damaged or incomplete, and should not be used - there is a risk of acci-
dent.
Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way.
Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times.
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
Description
Fig. 211 Carrier for the towing device/tow bar
Read and observe on page 182 first.
The ball rod is detachable and is located in the stowage compartment for the
spare / emergency wheel.
Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 211
Cap
Mounting recess
Protective cap
locking ball
Centering
Handwheel
Key
Lock cap
Red marking on the handwheel
Tow bar
Green marking on the handwheel
White marking on tow bar
Adjusting the ready position
Fig. 212 Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
182
Driving
Fig. 213 Setting the ready position
Read and observe on page 182 first.
The tow bar can only be fitted if it is in the ready position.
Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 212.
Insert the key into the lock
B
in the direction of arrow
2,
so that the arrow
on the key symbol shows.
Turn the key
B
to the stop in the direction of arrow
3,
so that the arrow on
the key points to the
» Fig. 213 symbol.
Pull the hand wheel
C
in the direction of the arrow
4
and turn in the direc-
tion of the arrow
5
to the stop. The hand wheel
C
remains locked in this
position.
Check the setting of the standby position
Fig. 214 Ready position
Read and observe on page 182 first.
Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 214
The key
A
is in the unlocked position - the arrow on the key points to the
symbol .
The locking ball
B
can be pushed fully into the tow bar.
The red marking
C
on the hand wheel points to the white marking on the
ball bar.
There is a clear gap of approx. 4 mm
D
between the hand wheel and the
tow bar.
When in the ready position, the key cannot be removed from the lock. The ball
bar is thus set ready for installation.
Assembling the bar ball - Step 1
Fig. 215
Remove cap for receiving shaft / use ball bar
Read and observe on page 182 first.
To
prepare for the installation, remove the cap for the receiving shaft
A
in
direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 215.
To install, hold the ball rod from underneath » Fig. 215.
Push the ball rod into the receiving shaft in the direction of arrow
2
until it
stops. The ball rod must audibly snap into place » .
The hand wheel
B
rotates back automatically and rests on the ball rod » .
WARNING
Do not hold the handwheel with your hand when attaching the ball bar -
there is a risk of finger injury.
183
Towing device and trailer
Assembling the bar ball - Step 2
Fig. 216 Secure the lock and remove key / place cap on lock
Read and observe on page 182 first.
Turn the key
A
in the direction of arrow
1,
so that the arrow on the key
symbol
» Fig. 216 shows.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fit the cap
B
on the lock in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Check that the ball rod is securely attached » page 184.
WARNING
After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key. The
tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted.
Check proper fitting
Fig. 217
Correctly secured ball head
Read and observe on page 182 first.
Correctly secured tow bar » Fig. 217
The tow bar must sit securely in the receiving shaft. There must be no play
when “shaken” roughly.
The green marking
A
on the handwheel points to the white marking on
the tow bar.
The handwheel is tight against the ball rod.
The lock is locked and the key is removed.
The cap
B
is on the lock.
Removing the bar ball - Step 1.
Fig. 218
Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock
Fig. 219
Unlock lock
Read and observe on page 182 first.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. We recommend
putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar.
184
Driving
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 218.
Insert the key into the lock
B
in the direction of arrow
2,
so that the arrow
on the key symbol shows.
Turn the key
B
in the direction of arrow
3,
so that the arrow on the key
symbol » Fig. 219 shows.
Removing the bar ball - Step 2.
Fig. 220
Release tow bar
Read and observe on page 182 first.
Grasp the ball bar from below » Fig. 220.
Pull the hand wheel
A
in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Turn the pulled handwheel in the arrow direction
2
until it stops. Hold it in
this position.
Remove the tow bar from the mounting recess downwards and in the direc-
tion of the arrow
3
. At the same time, the ball rod latches into the ready po-
sition and is therefore ready to be re-fitted.
After removing the ball rod, insert the cap for the receiving shaft
A
against
the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 215 on page 183.
If the hand wheel
A
is not turned all the way to the stop, then it will return to
its initial position when the tow bar is removed and will rest on the tow bar and
not engage into the ready position. The ball head then needs to be brought in-
to this position before the next time it is fitted » page 182, Adjusting the ready
position.
The ball rod must be cleaned before it is stored in the box with the tool kit.
WARNING
Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause
damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the
occupants at risk.
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Read and observe on page 182 first.
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
permissible total weight including load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing
device) is 70 cm .
The permissible total weight of the installed accessories, including load, cor-
responds to the maximum trailer load on trailers, but must not exceed 50 kg.
This value applies when the centre of gravity of the load is a maximum of 30
cm from the ball head of the tow bar.
As the distance of the centre gravity of the load from the ball head of the
towing device increases, the permissible total weight of the accessory, in-
cluding the load, decreases (e.g. at a distance of 60 cm from the ball head,
the permissible weight decreases approximately by half).
CAUTION
Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
maximum length of the accessories – There is a risk of damage to the towing
device.
Note
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
185
Towing device and trailer
Use the towing device
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect
Fig. 221
Swivel out the 13-pin power
socket, safety eyelet
Connecting / disconnecting
Install the tow bar and the remove the protective cap
3
» Fig. 211 on
page 182.
Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the ball head.
Grasp the 13-pin socket at the handle
A
and swing out in the direction of
the arrow » Fig. 221.
Plug the trailer (accessory) connector into the 13-pin socket. (If the trailer /
accessories have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding reduction piece
from the ŠKODA Original Accessories).
Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet
B
(the
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order.
Exterior mirrors
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors.
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights
» page 60.
Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec-
ted consumers.
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted.
WARNING
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
trical shock.
After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accesso-
ry) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
Never use the securing eye to tow - risk of accident!
CAUTION
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
The total power consumption of all the connected consumers to the trailer
power supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage
to the electrical system of the vehicle.
Loading a trailer
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 205.
Distribution of the cargo
Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Drive with particular caution if you cannot avoid driving with
this combination.
WARNING
A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety
- there is a risk of accident!
186
Driving
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
Permissible trailer load
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
1.0 l/70 kW TSI MG 1000 580
DSG 1000 600
1.0 l/81 kW TSI MG 1100 590
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
DSG 1200 610
DSG (Green tec) 1200 610
1.6 l/66 kW MPI MG 1000 580
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
MG 1000 580
AG 1000 600
1.4 ltr./66 kW TDI CR
MG 1000 620
DSG 1000 630
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1200 640
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h
(when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when
the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1).
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accel-
erating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a
brake.
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (herein-
after only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
coupled or uncoupled » page 56.
187
Towing device and trailer
Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
device.
The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
means of the trailer socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional.
The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights.
188
Driving
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations
Introduction
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO must be observed when
using accessories or carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical altera-
tions to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition.
WARNING
Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle should only be
carried out by a specialist. Work carried out incorrectly (including work on
the electronic components and their software) can result in malfunctions -
there is a risk of accident and, potentially, increased wear on parts!
We recommend that you use only ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKO-
DA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your ve-
hicle. Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with
these.
Do not use any products which have not been approved by ŠKODA AU-
TO, even though these may be products with a type approval or which have
been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Read and observe on page 189 first.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with the
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA partner. He or she
will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full func-
tioning of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant, changing the battery
or similar).
ŠKODA Service partner
Read and observe on page 189 first.
All ŠKODA Service Partners work according to the instructions and guidelines
from ŠKODA AUTO. All service and repair work is therefore carried out on
time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions and guide-
lines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical
condition.
We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
ŠKODA Original parts
Read and observe
on page 189 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts comply wholly with ŠKODA
AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series production.
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
products.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA Original accessories
Read and observe on page 189 first.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
ing.
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch the suitability of other products
for your vehicle, despite the fact that some products may have operational ap-
proval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laborato-
ry.
189
Care and maintenance
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Acces-
sories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with
the materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agree-
ment or any other agreements.
Spoiler
Read and observe on page 189 first.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a Genuine Accessories spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following in-
structions must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and se-
rious injuries!
The vehicle can only be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
A Genuine Accessories spoiler cannot be fitted to the front bumper ei-
ther on its own (without a spoiler on the boot lid) or in combination with an
unsuitable spoiler on the boot lid.
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any re-
pairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
Improperly conducted work on the spoilers of your vehicle may result in
malfunction.
Component protection
Read and observe on page 189 first.
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac-
tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita-
tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
Airbags
Read and observe on page 189 first.
WARNING
Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tyre combinations, can impair the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
WARNING
No changes may be made to airbag system components, the front bump-
er and the bodywork.
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must be replaced.
Cleaning and care
Introduction
Regular and thorough care helps to retain the value of your vehicle.
The instructions for use on the packaging must be observed when using care
products. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Original Accessories care
products.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not
completely independent, e.g. children - danger of poisoning!
190
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - danger of dam-
aging the surface to be cleaned.
Note
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and maintained at a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
Car washing
Read and observe and on page 190 first.
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de-
posits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their de-
structive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive
sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
It is also essential to thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
Washing by hand
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, with a soft sponge or a wash mitt and
plenty of water, and, if necessary, with the appropriate detergents. Wash out
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
For wheels, door sills and lower areas of the vehicle use a different sponge.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
Automatic car washes
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
(e.g. closing the windows and the tilt/slide roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any special attached parts (e.g. spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial etc.) it is best to consult the operator of the car
wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the wiper blades should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de-
greased.
Pressure washers
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to instruc-
tions regarding the pressure and spraying distance from the vehicle surface.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells -
there is a risk of injury from sharp metal parts!
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body
while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be no more than
60 °C max. - otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint.
Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - risk of dam-
age.
For vehicles with roof antenna, the antenna rod should be unscrewed before
driving through a car wash - there is a risk of damage.
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle with high-pressure cleaners
Do not wash the foils using pressure washers - there is a risk of damage.
Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
During cleaning, always keep a sufficiently large spraying distance in particu-
lar from the parking sensors, the reversing camera lens, the external decorative
and protective plastic parts (e.g. roof racks, spoilers, protective strips) and oth-
er vehicle parts made of non-metallic materials, such as rubber hoses or insula-
tion materials – otherwise there is a risk of damage.
191
Care and maintenance
Exterior car care
Read and observe and on page 190 first.
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Paint
Spilled fuel
Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
possible)
No water drop-
lets form on the
paint
Use hard wax preserve (at least twice a
year), apply wax to clean and dry body
Paint has gone
matt
Use polish, then wax (if the polish does
not contain any preservative ingredi-
ents)
Plastic parts Soiling
Clear water, cloth / sponge, possibly
cleaners provided for this purpose
Chrome
and anodised
parts
Soiling
Clear water, cloth, possibly cleaners
provided for this purpose, clean then
polish with a soft dry cloth
Films Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Windows
and door mirrors
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
wipe specifically for that purpose
Head lights /
lights
Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Reversing camera
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth
Snow/ice Hand brush / de-icer
Door lock cylin-
ders
Snow/ice
De-icing fluid specifically for that pur-
pose
Wiper / wiper
blades
Soiling Windscreen cleaner, sponge or cloth
Wheels Soiling
Clear water, then apply appropriate
substance
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
be lubricated with a suitable lubricant.
The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing de-
vice with a suitable grease whenever necessary.
Protection of cavities
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
by a layer of long-lasting protective wax applied in the factory.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner.
Underbody
The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
against chemical and mechanical influences.
We recommend having the protective coating — preferably before the begin-
ning of winter and at the end of winter.
Product life of the films
Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
the life of the films. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal;
this is not a fault.
Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour.
When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is an
increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load).
CAUTION
Vehicle paint
Repair damaged areas as soon as possible.
Matt-painted parts should not be treated with polishes or hard waxes.
Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
Plastic parts
Do not use paint polish.
Chromed and anodised parts
Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of surface scratches.
Films
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of film
damage.
Do not use dirty cloths or sponges for cleaning.
Do not use a scraper or other means to remove ice and snow.
192
General Maintenance
Do not polish the films
Do not use a high pressure cleaner on the films.
Rubber seals
Do not treat the door seals and window guides deal with anything - the
protective varnish coating could be damaged.
Windows and door mirrors
Do not clean the insides of the windows/mirrors with sharp objects - risk of
damage to the filaments or the antenna.
Do not use a cloth which has been used to polish the body - this could dirty
the window and impair visibility.
Head lights / lights
Do not wipe headlight/lights dry, do not use any sharp objects - risk of
damage to the protective coating and cracks forming on the headlight glass
covers.
Reversing camera
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
camera damage.
Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
Door lock cylinders
Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder
when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
Wheels
Heavy soiling of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels - the re-
sult can be a vibration, which can cause premature wear of the steering.
Removing snow and ice from the windscreens
Fig. 222
Installation location of the ice
scraper, removing the scraper
Read and observe and on page 190 first.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow
» Fig. 222.
CAUTION
Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to
the glass surface.
Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand,
road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface.
Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels
that have been fitted by the factory.
Caring for the interior
Read and observe and on page 190 first.
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Natural leather /
Faux leather /
Alcantara
®
/
Material
Dust, surface
soiling
Vacuum cleaner
Soiling (fresh)
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool
cloth, if necessary, mild soap solution
a)
,
then wipe off with a soft cloth
Stubborn stains Cleaning fluid specifically for this task
Care (natural
leather)
Treat the leather periodically with a
leather protecting fluid / use a care
cream with light blocker and impregna-
tion after each cleaning
Care (Alcan-
tara
®
/ material)
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning
glove”.
Remove pills from materials with a
brush
Plastic parts Soiling
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, if
necessary cleaners specifically for this
purpose
193
Care and maintenance
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Windows Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
wipe specifically for that purpose
Covers on electri-
cally heated seats
Soiling Cleaners specifically for this purpose
Seat belts » Soiling soft cloth and mild soap solution
a)
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
WARNING
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.
CAUTION
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara
®
/ material
Avoid standing for lengthy periods in bright sunlight, and protect the mate-
rials by covering to prevent them from fading.
Remove fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish and similar) as
soon as possible.
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
that no water gets into the seams - risk of damaging the leather!
Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
Do not use leather cleaners, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar
agents on Alcantara
®
seat upholstery.
Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness - this could lead to clearly visible discolouration on the upholstery. This
is not a defect in the fabric.
Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can dam-
age the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage will not be recognised
as a justified complaint.
Plastic parts
Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of damage to
the dash panel.
Windows
Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk
of damage.
Covers on electrically heated seats
Do not clean either with water or with other liquids - risk of damage to the
heating system.
Do not dry by switching on the heating.
Seat belts
After cleaning the belts, allow them to dry before retracting them.
Note
During vehicle use, some minor changes may become visible on the leather
and Alcantara
®
(due to e.g. folds, discolouration).
194
General Maintenance
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Introduction
Fig. 223
Stickers showing the prescribed
fuel
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 223.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres, including a reserve of approx.
7 litres.
WARNING
The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - it can be fatal!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the
exhaust system.
Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with
the intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in that coun-
try and/or whether the manufacturer will sanction operating the vehicle with
another fuel.
Petrol and diesel refuelling
Fig. 224 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
Read and observe
and on page 195 first.
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
The vehicle is unlocked.
The ignition is switched off.
Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow
1
and fold in the direction of
arrow
2
» Fig. 224.
Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow
3
.
Remove the tank cap and place on top of the fuel filler flap in direction of ar-
row
4
.
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time.
Do not continue refuelling.
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the
pump.
Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow until it securely engages
3
.
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Unleaded petrol
Read and observe and on page 195 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 223 on page 195.
195
Inspecting and replenishing
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol containing a maximum
of 10% bioethanol (E10).
Unleaded petrol must correspond to the European Standard EN 228 (in Ger-
many DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 91
or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98).
Prescribed fuel 95/min. 92 and 93 RON
We recommend using petrol 95 RON.
Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly
increased fuel consumption).
In an emergency, petrol 91 RON can be used (slight power loss, slightly in-
creased fuel consumption)» .
Specified petrol is unleaded, min. 95 RON / RON
Use at least 95 ROZ petrol.
In an emergency, 91. 92 or 93 RON petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption)»
.
Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / RON
We recommend using petrol 98 RON.
Optionally, petrol 95 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased
fuel consumption).
In an emergency, 91. 92 or 93 RON petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption)»
.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of dam-
age to the engine and to the exhaust system.
When petrol with a lower than the prescribed octane is used, only continue
driving at mid-range engine speeds and with minimal strain on the engine. Re-
fuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
Lower than 91 octane petrol should not be used, even in an emergency!
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en-
gine or switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
Petrol additives (additives)
Unleaded petrol in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
conditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore do not recommend mix-
ing fuel additives into the petrol - risk of engine damage or damage to the ex-
haust system.
The following additives may not be used - risk of engine damage or dam-
age to the exhaust system!
Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with
manganese and iron content.
Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol).
Note
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON does not result in
either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles
for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.
On vehicles using the prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can lead to an increase in
power and reduction in fuel consumption.
Diesel fuel
Read and observe and on page 195 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 223 on page 195.
Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that complies with Europe-
an Standard EN 590 (also standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard
ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia).
The diesel fuel may contain a maximum of 7% biodiesel (B7 - In Germany in
accordance with DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590).
Operating under different weather conditions
Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather condi-
tions. Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corre-
sponds to these conditions.
196
General Maintenance
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 225
Opening the bonnet
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
Open flap
Ensure that the windscreen wipers are not raised away from the windscreen
- risk of damage to the bonnet.
Open the front door and pull the release lever below the dash panel in the
direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 225.
Press the release lever in the direction of arrow
2
and the bonnet will be un-
locked.
Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow
4
from the holder.
Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di-
rection of arrow
5
.
Close the flap
Lift the bonnet.
Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it.
Drop down the bonnet lid from a height of about 20 cm applying light pres-
sure until it clicks safely into place.
WARNING
Never drive with the bonnet lid not properly closed - risk of accident!
Make sure that when closing the bonnet, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
When closing the bonnet “do not press down” - there is a risk of damaging the
bonnet.
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 226
Arrangement (example) in the engine compartment
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
Coolant expansion reservoir
200
Engine oil dipstick
199
Engine oil filler opening
199
Brake fluid reservoir
201
Vehicle battery
202
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 199
A
B
C
D
E
F
198
General Maintenance
Windscreen washer fluid
Fig. 227
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
voir
Read and observe and on page 197 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir
A
is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 227.
The contents of the container is 3.5 litres, for vehicles with a headlamp clean-
ing system 5.4 litres (for some countries, both versions have container vol-
umes of 5.4 litres).
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid for the current or expected weather
conditions. We recommend that you use windscreen washer fluid from
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use
windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights.
Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when
replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be-
come contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to mal-
function.
Engine oil
Specification
To find out which type of engine oil you can use for your vehicle, contact a
specialist garage.
If this oil is not available, other oils can also be refilled. To prevent engine dam-
age, a maximum of 0.5 l of engine oil with the following specifications may be
used until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or
API SN, (API SM);
Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
Check and refill
Fig. 228
Dipstick variants
The engine uses up some oil, depending on driving style and operating condi-
tions (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this
during the first 5 000 km.
Have the oil change carried out by a specialist garage during the inspection.
Check and refill oil under the following conditions.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
The engine operating temperature is reached.
The engine is turned off.
Checking the level
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
Pull the dipstick out and wipe with a clean cloth.
Push the dipstick back to the stop and then pull it out again.
Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in.
The oil level must lie in range
A
» Fig. 228. If the oil level is below range
A
, oil
must be added.
199
Inspecting and replenishing
Refilling
Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening
C
» Fig. 226 on page 198.
Add oil of the correct specification in portions of 0.5 litres » page 199.
Check the oil level.
Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 197.
CAUTION
The oil level must never fall outside range
A
» Fig. 228 – otherwise there is a
risk of damaging the engine and the exhaust system.
If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range
A
, do not
continue driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Do not add any additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.
Note
Too low engine oil level is shown in the instrument cluster by the warning
light illuminating and also indicated by the message » page 44. Neverthe-
less, we recommend checking the oil level on a regular basis using the dipstick.
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Coolant
Introduction
The coolant helps to keep the engine temperature down, and consists of water
and coolant additive (with additives that protect the cooling system against
corrosion and prevent furring).
The proportion of coolant additive in the coolant must be 40 to 60 %.
The correct mix of water and coolant additive should be checked and if neces-
sary corrected by a specialist garage.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 197.
Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurised - risk of scalding or
injury from splashes of coolant!
To protect against the coolant splashing, cover the cap with a cloth when
opening.
Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant.
If the coolant comes into contact with the eye or skin, wash the affected
area with plenty of water for several minutes, and where appropriate seek
medical help.
CAUTION
Do not cover the radiator and install any parts (e.g auxiliary lights.) in front of
the air intakes - risk of the engine overheating.
Checking and refilling
Fig. 229
Coolant expansion reservoir
Read and observe and on page 200 first.
Check and refill coolant under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm the result of the check may
be wrong).
The engine is turned off.
Check the coolant level – The coolant level must lie between the marks
A
and
B
» Fig. 229. If the coolant level is below the mark
B
, top up with cool-
ant.
200
General Maintenance
Refilling
The reservoir must always contain a small amount of coolant » .
Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap
carefully.
Always top up using coolant of the correct specification.
Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification for the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir
» Fig. 229.
If the specified coolant is not available, then refilling only with distilled or dem-
ineralised water, and get a specialist garage to correct the water-coolant addi-
tive mix as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
aerate - risk of engine damage! Do not drive the vehicle. Switch off the en-
gine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Do not fill the coolant above the mark
A
» Fig. 229. The coolant could, when
heated, be expelled from the cooling system - risk of damage to the engine
parts.
If it is not possible to add coolant, do not continue driving! Switch off the
engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification
can reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - risk of damage to
the cooling system and the engine.
If non-distilled (non-demineralised) water has been used to top up, the cool-
ant should be replaced by a specialist garage - risk of engine damage.
A loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling system - risk of engine dam-
age. Top up with coolant and then seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Note
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and a corresponding message » page 43. We still recommend
inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Brake fluid
Fig. 230
Brake fluid reservoir
Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is turned off.
Checking the brake fluid level – The brake fluid level must lie between the
markings “MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 230.
Specification - the brake fluid must comply with the standard VW 501 14 (this
standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4).
The brake fluid change is carried out during the inspection.
WARNING
If the date of the brake fluid change is exceeded, steam bubbles could
form in the brake system during heavy braking. This can impair the efficien-
cy of the brakes – risk of accident!
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 197.
If the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below
the “MIN” » Fig. 230 mark, this may be an indication of a leak in the brake
system. Stop driving – There is a risk of an accident! Seek help from a
specialist garage.
Note
A brake fluid level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and a corresponding message» page 38. We still recommend
inspecting the brake fluid level in the reservoir from time to time.
201
Inspecting and replenishing
Vehicle battery
Introduction
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
Depending on the engine, the vehicle battery is either in the engine compart-
ment or the luggage compartment.
Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the vehicle
battery
The on-board power supply system tries to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging in the following ways when it is subject to heavy loading.
By increasing the engine idle speed.
Through the power limitation of certain consumers.
By switching off some consumers (heated seats, heated rear window) for as
long as necessary.
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol Meaning
Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is highly corrosive - it can cause injury, chemical burns or poi-
soning! Corrosive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory
tract and the eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
WARNING (Continued)
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Get
medical assistance without delay.
Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
pendent (e.g. children).
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings.
WARNING
Working on the car battery may cause explosion, fire, injury or chemical
burn! The following guidelines must be observed.
Do not smoke, use open flames or light or transmitting devices.
A discharged vehicle battery may freeze slightly. Never charge up a fro-
zen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
Never use a damaged vehicle battery.
Do not connect the battery terminals, bridging the two poles will cause a
short circuit.
CAUTION
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
Note
We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
202
General Maintenance
Checking the condition
Fig. 231
Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
Read and observe and on page 202 first.
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the
inspection.
Check the acid level
For car batteries with acid level indicator, acidity can be checked on the basis
of a colour display. In vehicle batteries with the label “AGM” there is no acid
level examination.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
tap on the indicator before carrying out the check » Fig. 231.
Black colour – electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Battery discharge
If frequent short journeys are made, the vehicle battery does not recharge suf-
ficiently.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, disconnect the negative
terminal of the battery or charge the battery constantly with a very low
charging current.
Charging
Read and observe and on page 202 first.
Only charge the battery when the ignition and all consumers are switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
For vehicles with the START-STOPP system or auxiliary heater, clamp the
terminal of the charger on the pole of the battery, the terminal of the
charger on the earth point of the engine» page 215.
For vehicles without the START-STOPP system or auxiliary heater, clamp the
terminals of the charger on the associated battery poles ( on , on ).
Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
mains cable from the power socket.
Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
WARNING
When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo-
sion. An explosion can be caused through sparking while unclamping or
loosening the cable plug.
So-called“quick-charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and re-
quires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have “Quick
loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
Disconnecting/reconnecting and replacing
Read and observe and on page 202 first.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
size as the original battery.
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
To disconnect, switch off the ignition and disconnect the negative terminal
first , then disconnect the positive terminal .
To reconnect, reconnect the positive terminal first , then reconnect the
negative terminal .
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func-
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
203
Inspecting and replenishing
Function / device Commissioning
Electric windows » page 60
Time settings » page 46
CAUTION
Disconnect the battery only with the ignition and consumers turned off - risk
of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
Before disconnecting the battery, always close all the electric windows -
there is a risk of malfunction.
Under no circumstances mix up the charging cables – risk of fire.
Note
After disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery, we recommend
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality
of the vehicle is guaranteed.
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
New tyres, during the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and
appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving.
Tyres with the deeper profiles should always be fitted to the front wheels.
Rims and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
ommend that you use rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheels and tyres should always be stored in a cool, dry and dark place. The
tyres themselves should be stored vertically.
Tyre life
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
used. Do not use tyres that are older than 6 years.
The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the in-
side). E.g. DOT ... 10 17... means that the tyres were produced in the 10th week
of the year 2017.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre’s profile immediately (e.g. small
stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed and help should be sought from a specialist garage.
Fitting new tyres
Only fit approved radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and
the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
Directional tyres
Some tyres may be directional. The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked
by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
204
General Maintenance
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the fol-
lowing tyre characteristics may be degraded.
Driving stability.
Traction.
Tyre noise and tyre wear.
WARNING
Never use damaged tyres or tyres that are older than 6 years old – risk of
accident.
CAUTION
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances (e.g. oil, grease
and fuel) which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with these
substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a specialist
workshop.
Do not use rims with ground or polished surfaces in winter conditions - there
is a risk of rim damage (e.g through salt spreading).
Tyre pressure
Fig. 232 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
The prescribed tyre pressure is indicated on the sticker with pictograms
A
» Fig. 232 (for some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
Inflation pressure for half load
Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
fuel consumption and emissions)
Inflation pressure for full load
B
C
D
Tyre diameter in inches
This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre
pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in
the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of con-
formity (in so-called COC document).
Tyre pressure value on the front axle
Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Required tire pressure value for the emergency wheel
Check tyre pressures
Check the tyre pressure (including that of the emergency or spare wheel) at
least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce
the higher pressure on warm tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 180.
WARNING
Do not drive with incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident.
In the event of very rapid pressure loss (e.g. in the event of tyre damage)
an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without
sudden steering movements and without any hard braking - risk of acci-
dent.
Note
The declaration of conformity (the so-called COC document) can be obtained
from a ŠKODA partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
E
F
G
H
205
Wheels
Tyre wear and wheel change
Fig. 233 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change
Tyre wear increases in the following circumstances.
Incorrect tyre pressures.
Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / braking).
Incorrect wheel balancing (you should have the wheels balanced after chang-
ing/repair tyres or if the steering “is drifting”).
Wheel alignment errors.
There are wear indicator markers in the tyre treads, indicating whether the
minimum permissible tread depth has been reached » Fig. 233 -
. A tyre
should be regarded as worn out when this indicator is flush with the tread.
Markings on the walls of the tyres with the letters “TWI” or other symbols (e.g.
) indicate the position of the wear indicators.
To ensure uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the
wheels every 10 000 km, in line with the schedule » Fig. 233 -
.
WARNING
Change the tyres at the latest when they are worn down to the wear indi-
cators - risk of accident.
Faulty wheel alignment affects handling - risk of accident.
Unusual vibrations or the vehicle “pulling ” to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If there are no external signs of tyre
damage, seek the help of a specialist garage.
Spare wheel
A full spare wheel is identical to the wheels mounted on the vehicle.
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warning label on the rim. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
Instructions for using a temporary spare wheel
Do not cover the warning sign.
Be particularly observant when driving.
Inflate the spare wheel to the maximum prescribed inflation pressure
» page 205.
WARNING
A temporary spare wheel can only be used for a short time in the event of a
breakdown and with a correspondingly careful driving method.
Emergency spare wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
The emergency wheel is significantly narrower than the wheels mounted
ex-factory.
Instructions for using an emergency wheel
Do not cover the warning sign.
Be particularly observant when driving.
WARNING
Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare
wheel.
Do not drive with more than one spare wheel mounted!
Avoid full throttle acceleration, sharp braking and fast cornering when
driving with the temporary spare wheel.
Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel.
Tyre marking
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 185/60 R 15 84 H
185 Tyre width in mm
60 Height/width ratio in %
206
General Maintenance
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
15 Diameter of wheel in inches
84 Load index
H Speed symbol
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre
Load index
83 84 85 86 87 88
Load
(In kg)
487 500 515 530 545 560
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fit-
ted with tyres in a given category
Speed
symbol
S T U H V W
Maximum
speed
(in km/h)
180 190 200 210 240 270
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – risk of accident.
Operating in winter conditions
All-year (or “winter”) tyres
All-year or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake
symbol
) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions.
To get the best possible driving characteristics, all-year or “winter”tyres, with a
minimum tread depth of 4 mm on all four wheels, should be fitted.
If “winter” tyres are fitted, summer tyres should be fitted again in good time as
they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre
noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as
at temperatures above 7 °C.
Speed symbol
All-year or “winter”tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol )
of a lower speed category than listed in the vehicle’s technical documentation
can be used provided that the maximum permissible speed for these tyres is
not exceeded even if the maximum possible speed of the vehicle is higher.
On vehicles with Infotainment, the speed limit for all-season or “winter” tyres
can be set with the button

in menu

Tyres
. For other vehicles,
there is the possibility to set the speed limit for winter tyres at a specialist ga-
rage.
the vehicle has all-season or “winter” tyres with a speed category that is lower
than the specified top speed of the vehicle (does not apply to factory-supplied
tyres), a warning label with the maximum value of the speed category supplied
for the mounted tyres in the interior of the vehicle and in a place which is con-
stantly visible in the driver’s field of vision. The warning label (sticker) can be
replaced by setting the maximum value of the speed category specified for the
mounted tyres in Infotainment (only applies to certain countries). This specifi-
cation defines the maximum vehicle speed with mounted all-season or “win-
ter”tires that must not be exceeded.
Snow chains
The snow chains improve handling in wintry road conditions.
Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full wheel trims.
Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to
the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
5J x 14 35 mm 175/70 R14
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6J x 15 38 mm 185/60 R15
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow and ice-free routes - the handling would be im-
paired and there is a risk of damage to the tyres.
207
Wheels
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
Fig. 234
Placing of the first-aid kit and
the warning triangle
The following information is for the first aid kit and warning triangle from the
ŠKODA Original accessories valid.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid box can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the lug-
gage compartment » Fig. 234.
Placing of the warning triangle
The warning triangle can be inserted into the recess under the loading edge
and secured with the fastener tape » Fig. 234.
To release, press the clasp on the strap in the direction of arrow
1
and fold
open the strap
A
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 234.
To secure, fold up the belt
A
against the arrow direction
2
until it locks in-
to place.
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle - there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Location of reflective vest
Fig. 235
Storage compartment for the
reflective vest
The reflective vest can be stored in a holder under the driver's seat » Fig. 235.
fire extinguisher
Fig. 236
Release the fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driv-
er's seat.
To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two straps
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 236 and remove the fire extinguisher.
To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
The Owner´s Manual is located next to the fire extinguisher.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the
correct function of the device is not guaranteed.
WARNING
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher - there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
208
Do-it-yourself
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 237
Vehicle tool kit
The box with the tool kit is located in the storage compartment for the spare
wheel and may be secured with tape, depending on specification.
Depending on the equipment, not all the components listed in the on-board
tool kit have to be contained in it.
Screwdriver
Spanner for removing and installing the tail light
Top section for the anti-theft wheel bolts
Towing eyelet
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
Jack with sign
Wheel wrench
Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
Breakdown kit
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehi-
cle. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with it –
there is a risk of injury.
Always stow the tool safely in the box and make sure that it is attached
with the belt to the spare wheel - otherwise it could cause injury to the oc-
cupants if breaking suddenly or colliding with another vehicle.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box –
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the box.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
changing a wheel on the road.
Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road while the wheel is being changed (they should remain behind a crash
barrier, for instance).
Uncouple any trailers.
Changing a wheel
Take out the emergency or spare wheel » page 210.
Remove the full wheel trim » page 210 or caps » page 211.
Loosen the wheel bolts » page 211 » .
Jack up the vehicle» page 212 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of
the ground.
Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
Remove the wheel carefully.
Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle.
209
Emergency equipment and self-help
Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“pull-
ing crossways”)» page 211.
Replace the wheel trim » page 210 and caps » page 211.
When fitting a wheel with directional tyres, ensure that the direction of rota-
tion is correct » page 204.
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If screws are corroded and diffi-
cult to move, these must be replaced.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn), provided the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come loose and fall
off – risk of injury.
Under no circumstances must the bolts be greased or oiled - could cause
an accident.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage
compartment and secure with a locking screw.
Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band.
Check tyre pressure on the mounted wheel and adjust if necessary and, with
vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 180.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible.
The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm.
Replace the damaged tyre. Repairing the tyre is not recommended.
WARNING
Tightening torque which is too high can damage the threads and this can
result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. Where
tightening torque is too low, the wheels may become loose while driving -
risk of accident. Therefore, drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed
until the tightening torque has been checked.
Removing/stowing the emergency or spare wheel
Fig. 238
Take out the wheel
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw » Fig. 238.
Take out the wheel
Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
Unscrew the fastening screw in the direction of arrow » Fig. 238 and the re-
move the wheel.
Stow the wheel
Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot, lay down the wheel with the
outer face upward.
Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
Screw the fastening screw opposite to the direction of arrow until it stops
» Fig. 238.
Place the box with the tool kit back inside the wheel and secure it with the
tape.
Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
Full wheel trim
Remove trim
Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims at the edge of one of the
ventilation openings in the full wheel trim.
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
210
Do-it-yourself
Install trim
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is indicated by means of a symbol on
the back of the wheel trim supplied ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original
Accessories. If using the anti-theft wheel bolt it should be fitted at this point
» .
WARNING
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries. A sufficient air supply may not be able to be guaranteed with other
wheel trims to cool the braking system – Otherwise there is a risk of an ac-
cident.
CAUTION
If the wheel trim is positioned outside the position marked for the anti-theft
wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel cover.
Use only manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – otherwise there
is a risk of damaging the trim.
Note
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 239
Remove the cap
To remove the cap insert the extraction pliers as far as they will go on the
cap and pulling them out in the direction of arrow » Fig. 239.
To install, insert the cap onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 240
Anti-theft wheel bolt and at-
tachment
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. This can only be
loosened/tightened with attachment
B
» Fig. 240.
Insert the upper section
B
on the anti-theft wheel bolt
A
until it stops.
Insert the key as far as it will go onto attachment
B
and loosen / tighten the
wheel bolt.
Remove the attachment.
The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the
vehicle in case of a possible wheel change!
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
the wheel trim.
Note
We recommend that you retain the label with the code number. A replacement
upper section can be acquired from ŠKODA Original Parts based on this.
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 241
Loosening the wheel bolts
211
Emergency equipment and self-help
Insert the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated
attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 240 on page 211.
To loosen the screws, grasp the key end and turn the screw about one turn
rotation in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 241.
To tighten the screws grasp the key end and turn the screw against the di-
rection of the arrow » Fig. 241, until it is tight.
WARNING
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing - danger of injury.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 242
Jacking points for the jack
Fig. 243 Attach lifting jack
Before the vehicle is raised, please take note of the safety instructions » .
In order to raise the vehicle, the jack from the tool kit is to be used. Position
the jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel to be replaced.
The jacking points are located on the lower sill » Fig. 242.
Position the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack will fit in the jacking point when raised » Fig. 243 -
.
Use the crank to raise the jack until its pawl covers the jacking point
» Fig. 243- .
Raise the vehicle until the wheel is a little off the floor.
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is risk of in-
jury.
Ensure the vehicle cannot unexpectedly roll away.
Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
Place a wide and stable base material under the jack if on a loose surfa-
ces (e.g. gravel).
Place an anti-slip base material (e.g. a rubber mat) under the jack if on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
Never position any body parts (e.g. arms or legs) under the vehicle while
the vehicle is raised.
When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the
lower beam – otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Breakdown kit
Introduction
The following information applies for the breakdown kit supplied ex-factory.
The breakdown kit can be used to seal punctures with a diameter of up to
about 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma-
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga-
rage.
Replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit as soon as possi-
ble, or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
212
Do-it-yourself
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails).
Do not use the breakdown kit in the following cases.
The rim is damaged.
The outdoor temperature is below the minimum temperature indicated in
the instruction manual for the tyre filling bottle with sealant.
Tyre punctures greater than 4 mm.
Damage to the tyre wall.
The use-by date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
If there is skin contact with the sealant wash the affected area immedi-
ately.
Observe the instructions provided in the puncture repair kit manufactur-
er's instructions for use.
Description of the breakdown kit
Fig. 244 Description of the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 213 first.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment.
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Valve remover
Inflation hose with plug
1
2
3
Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
Tyre inflation hose
Button for the tyre pressure reduction
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
12 volt cable connector
ON and OFF switch
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
Preparing to use the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 213 first.
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
undertaking a wheel repair on a road.
Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission, select 1st gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
Have all the occupants get out. While the repair is being carried out, the
passengers should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind
a crash barrier, for instance).
Uncouple any trailers.
Sealing and inflating tyres
Read and observe on page 213 first.
Sealing
Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
213
Emergency equipment and self-help
Attach the valve remover
2
» Fig. 244 on page 213 onto the valve insert, so
that the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover.
Unscrew the valve insert and place it on a clean base (rag, paper etc.).
Forcefully shake bottle
10
several times.
Firmly screw the inflation hose
3
onto the tyre inflater bottle
10
. The film
on the bottle cap is pierced.
Remove the plug from the inflation hose
3
and insert the bottle onto the
tyre valve.
Hold the bottle
10
with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve.
Screw in the valve insert with the valve remover
2
.
Inflating
Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose
5
» Fig. 244 on page 213 firmly
onto the tyre valve.
For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Start the engine.
Plug the connector
8
into the 12 volt socket » page 79.
Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch
9
.
Once tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has been reached, turn off the air
compressor. Observe the maximum running time of the air compressor ac-
cording to the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer »
.
If an air pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has not been reached, unscrew the tyre infla-
tion hose
5
from the tyre valve.
Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing
agent to “distribute” in the tyre.
Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
5
back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
Stick the corresponding sticker
1
onto the dashboard in the driver's field of
view.
At a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, the journey can be continued at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph.
WARNING
If the tyre does not inflate to at least 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
ing inflated – there is a risk of burning.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor at the latest after the running time according to
the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer has elapsed – otherwise there is
the risk of compressor damage! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
nutes before switching it on again.
Information on driving with repaired tyres
Read and observe on page 213 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
minutes.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less
The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit.
Do not con-
tinue to drive! Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 205.
Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre. The following guidelines must be observed.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
214
Do-it-yourself
Jump-starting
Introduction
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 197.
When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
served » page 202.
A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat-
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion and injury!
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low
– risk of explosion and caustic burns!
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 245 Jump-starting: - discharged battery, - power-supplying
battery/ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
Fig. 246 Positive terminal on vehicles with the vehicle battery in the
luggage compartment
Read and observe on page 215 first.
If, because of a discharged battery, it is not possible to start the engine, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. To do this, jump-
start cables are required which have a sufficiently large cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the
power-supplying battery must not be significantly lower than the capacity of
the discharged battery.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
Attach clamp
1
to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
Attach clamp
2
to the positive terminal of the power-supplying battery.
Attach clamp
3
to the negative terminal of the power-supplying battery.
For vehicles with the START-STOP system, attach clamp
4
to the ground
point of the engine
A
» Fig. 245.
For vehicles without the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp
4
to a solid
metal part firmly attached to the engine block or directly to the engine block.
Installation location of the positive terminal and the earth point in vehicles
with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment
The positive terminal
B
is located under a cover in the engine compartment
» Fig. 246.
Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
of arrow
1
and remove the cover in the direction of arrow
2
.
Clamp the positive terminal of the jumper cable to the position
B
» Fig. 246.
215
Emergency equipment and self-help
Clamp the negative terminal of the jumper cable to the earthing point of the
engine
A
or on a metal part firmly connected to the engine block or directly
on the engine block.
Starting engine
Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
Initiate the starting process in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure
and repeat after half a minute.
Remove the jump start cables in the reverse order as attachment.
WARNING
Never clamp the jump cable to the negative terminal of the discharged
battery - risk of explosion.
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – there is a risk of short circuit.
The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehi-
cle – there is a risk of short circuit.
Position the jump cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts in
the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle dam-
age.
Towing the vehicle
Information about the towing process
Fig. 247
Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
To tow with a tow rope, use only a braided synthetic fibre rope » Fig. 247 -
» .
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes at the front
» page 217, towing eyes at the rear » page 217 or to the towing device of the
trailer device » page 182.
Conditions for towing.
Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
if it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the way described or if the towing
distance is greater than 50 km.
Driver of the tow vehicle
On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut.
Driver of the towed vehicle
If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. The brake
booster and power steering only operate if the engine is running, otherwise
much greater force has to be applied to the brake pedal and more power has
to be expended for steering.
If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the
steering wheel does not lock and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Keep the tow rope taut at all times during the towing procedure.
WARNING
Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 247- , the towing
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle – risk of accident.
The tow rope should not be twisted - there is a risk of accidents.
CAUTION
Do not tow-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine! The battery from
another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 215, Jump-starting.
For off-road towing manoeuvres, there is a risk to both vehicles that the fas-
teners may become overloaded and damaged.
216
Do-it-yourself
Note
We recommend that you use a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Front towing eye
Fig. 248
Remove cap / install towing eye
Cap removal/fitting
To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow
1
and remove it
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 248.
To fit, insert the cap in arrow range
1
and then press on the opposite edge
of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
To fit, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 248 until it clicks into place » .
Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
To remove, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow
3
.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye
could break whilst being towed.
Towing eye rear
Fig. 249
Rear towing eye
The rear towing eye is located below the bumper on the right.
Remove the protective cap before using the towing eye. » Fig. 249. Replace
the protective cap after using the towing eye.
Vehicles with a tow hitch
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the pre-installed detachable
tow-bar may be used » page 182, Hitch.
Remote control – Changing the battery
Introduction
CAUTION
The replacement battery must correspond to the original specification.
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
Note
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Part-
ner.
217
Emergency equipment and self-help
Key with fold-out key bit
Fig. 250 Opening the cover/removing the battery
Read and observe on page 217 first.
Pop out the key bit.
Press off the battery cover
A
» Fig. 250 with your thumb or by using a flat
screwdriver in region
B
.
Open the battery in the direction of arrow
1
.
Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow
2
and install a new
battery.
Insert the battery cover
A
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the key after replacing the battery » page 56.
Emergency unlocking/locking of doors
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Fig. 251
Handle on the driver's door:
open lock cover
The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the
key via the lock cylinder.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 251.
Release the door handle.
Insert the vehicle key bit into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Replace the cover.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
ing/unlocking.
Locking the door without locking cylinders
Fig. 252
Left door/right door
Open the corresponding door.
In vehicles with panel
A
, remove this panel » Fig. 252.
Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (spring-loa-
ded position).
Replace the cover
A
.
After closing, the door is locked.
218
Do-it-yourself
Unlocking the boot lid
Fig. 253
Unlocking the door
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside the vehicle.
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess in the trim » Fig. 253 as far
as the stop.
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Selector lever emergency unlocking
Fig. 254
Remove / release the selector lever
Firmly apply the handbrake.
With one hand on the edge of the cover, push in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 254.
At the same time lift the cover on the selector lever gaiter with the other
hand in direction of arrow
2
.
Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow
3
, simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position
N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
CAUTION
Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the
shift lever environment.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Introduction
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 255
Setting the service position for
the wiper arms
219
Emergency equipment and self-help
Fig. 256 Changing the front windscreen wiper blade
Read and observe on page 219 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blades, close the bonnet and put the
windscreen wiper arms into the service position.
Setting the service position
Switch the ignition on and off again.
Push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 255 within 10 seconds and hold
for approximately 2 seconds.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 256.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch
A
down in the direction of ar-
row
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow
3
until
it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attach-
ed.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Turn on the ignition and press the lever in the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 255.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 257 Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Read and observe on page 219 first.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the windscreen in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 257.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch
A
down in the direction of ar-
row
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow
3
until
it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attach-
ed.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
220
Do-it-yourself
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Fig. 258
Blown fuse
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa-
ble by the molten metal strip » Fig. 258
/
.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 197.
CAUTION
Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
“Do not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger fuses - dan-
ger of fire and damage to another electrical system.
Note
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
may exist for a single power consuming device.
Fuses in the dashboard
Fig. 259
Remove the fuse box cover.
Read and observe and on page 221 first.
The fuses are located on the bottom of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Remove the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 259 in the direction of the arrow.
Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Replace the bracket at the original position.
Insert the top edge of the cover into the dash panel first.
Push the lower edge of the cover in the region
A
.
221
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuse assignment in the dashboard
Fig. 260
Fuses: - LHD /
- RHD
Read and observe and on page 221 first.
No. Power consumer
1 Light - left
2
Central locking, front and rear window washer system (only with
KESSY or heated windscreen)
3 Ignition
4 Light - right
5 Power windows - driver
6 Interior lighting
7 Horn
8 Towing hitch
9
Operating lever beneath the steering wheel, engine control unit (only
without KESSY), automatic gearbox (only without KESSY), automatic
gearbox (only without KESSY), ESC (only without KESSY), towing
equipment (only without KESSY), power steering (only without KES-
SY)
10 Power windows - rear left
11 Headlight cleaning system
No. Power consumer
12 Infotainment screen
13 Multifunction unit for taxi vehicles
14
Operating lever under the steering wheel, light switch, ignition key
removal lock (automatic gearbox), headlight flasher, rain sensor, re-
versing camera
15
Air conditioning, automatic gearbox, diagnostic connector, heated
windscreen
16 Instrument cluster, emergency call
17 Anti-theft alarm, horn
18 Heating of the rear seats
19 Not assigned
20 Not assigned
21 Not assigned
22
Front and rear window washer system (without KESSY or without
heated windscreen)
23 Heated front seats
24
Blower fan for air conditioning system, heating, air conditioning,
heating
25 Not assigned
26 Heated front seats
27 Rear window wiper
28 Not assigned
29 Airbag
30
Electric windows, reverse light switches, air conditioning system,
Park Assist, exterior mirror settings, power feed for centre button
strip, power feed for side button strip, interior mirror, switch for haz-
ard warning lights
31
Fuel pump, radiator fan, cruise control, front and rear window wash-
er, light switch
32
Diagnostic connector, headlight levelling, control lever under the
steering wheel, voltage stabiliser for taxi vehicles
33 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch
34 Heated windscreen washer jets
222
Do-it-yourself
No. Power consumer
35 Not assigned
36 USB charge function
37 Radar
38 Not assigned
39 Electrical auxiliary heating system
40 Not assigned
41 Rear window heater
42 Power windows - front passenger
43 Towing hitch
44
Cigarette lighter, 12-volt outlet in the interior, 12-volt power socket
in the luggage compartment
45 Power windows - rear right
46
Front and rear window washer, operating lever under the steering
wheel
47 Towing hitch
48 Towing hitch
49 Fuel pump
50 Infotainment
51 Heating of the external mirror
52 KESSY
53 Steering lock (KESSY)
54 ABS or ESC
55 Not assigned
56 Not assigned
57 Not assigned
58 Heating of the rear seats
59 Not assigned
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 261 Cover for the fuse box - variant 1
Fig. 262
Cover for the fuse box - variant 2
Read and observe and on page 221 first.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
of arrow
1
» Fig. 261 or » Fig. 262 and remove the cover in the direction of
arrow
2
.
Remove the plastic clip from the holder on the cover of the fuse box in the
dashboard.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
Replace the bracket at the original position.
223
Fuses and light bulbs
CAUTION
The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be inserted
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
of damage to the vehicle!
Fuse assignment in engine compartment
Fig. 263
Fuses
Read and observe and on page 221 first.
No. Power consumer
1 Radiator fan
2 Glow plug system
3 ABS or ESC
4 Additional electrical heating, heated windscreen
5 Additional electrical heating, heated windscreen
6 Automatic gearbox
7 Engine control system
8 Windscreen wipers
9 Battery data module
10 ABS or ESC
11 Vacuum pump for the brake system
12 Injectors, valve for fuel metering, control valve for fuel pressure
13 Brake pedal switch
No. Power consumer
14 Fuel pump, radiator fan, cooling pump, pump for intercooling
15 Engine control system, voltage stabiliser for taxi vehicles
16 Starter
17 Engine control system
18
Additional electric heater, valve for intake manifold, supercharger reg-
ulator, oil temperature, valve for activated charcoal filter, valve for oil
pressure control
19 Lambda probe
20 Glow plug system, crankcase ventilation heater
Bulbs
Introduction
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi-
ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs, Xenon gas-discharge lamps or LED lights must be replaced by a special-
ist garage.
We recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other
expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 197.
Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty
by other road users.
224
Do-it-yourself
WARNING (Continued)
Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the
bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
Do not carry out any work on the Xenon gas discharge lamps - risk of
death!
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
damage to the headlights.
Note
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi-
cle.
Bulb arrangement in the halogen headlights
Fig. 264
Left headlight: Halogen headlight / halogen headlight with LED
daytime running lights
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Bulb arrangement » Fig. 264
Low beam
Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
A
B
Flashing
Main beam
Replace bulb for main beam, daytime running lights and parking
light (halogen headlight)
Fig. 265
Replacing the bulb for main
beam and separate daytime run-
ning lights
Fig. 266
Change the light bulb for the parking light
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Removing/inserting the bulb for main beam and separate daytime running
lights
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 265.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Replace the bulb in the holder.
Insert the holder with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
Turn the holder with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
C
D
225
Fuses and light bulbs
Fit the protective cap
B
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Removing/inserting the bulb for the parking light
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Remove the holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 266.
Hold the housing containing the bulb in area
A
.
Remove the faulty bulb from the housing in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insert a new bulb in the housing until it stops.
Insert the housing with bulb into the headlight again.
Fit the protective cap
B
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Changing the bulb for the low beam
Fig. 267
Changing the bulb for the low beam
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Remove the protective cap
A
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 267.
Remove the connector with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the connector.
Plug the connector into the new bulb so that the fixing lug
A
on the bulb
points upwards.
Insert the connector, with the bulb, into the headlight opposite to the direc-
tion of arrow
2
until you feel it lock into place.
Fit the protective cap
A
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light
Fig. 268
Changing the bulb for the front
turn signal light
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 268.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Replace the bulb in the holder.
Insert the holder with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
Turn the holder with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Replace the bulb for the main beam (halogen headlight with LED
daytime running lights)
Fig. 269
Changing the bulb for the main beam
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Remove the protective cap
D
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
226
Do-it-yourself
Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 269.
Remove the connector with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the connector.
Plug the connector into the new bulb so that the fixing lug
A
on the bulb
points downwards.
Insert the connector, with the bulb, into the headlight opposite to the direc-
tion of arrow
2
until you feel it lock into place.
Fit the protective cap
D
» Fig. 264 on page 225.
Replacing light bulbs for fog lights
Fig. 270
Removing / replacing the fog light bulb
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Removing the protective grille and headlight
Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening
A
» Fig. 270.
By pulling the hook in direction of arrow
1
, remove the protective grille in
the direction of arrow
2
.
Unscrew the screws
B
with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow
3
.
Replacing the light bulb
Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow
4
.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
5
.
Turn the holder with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow
6
.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
7
.
Insert a new holder with the bulb in the headlamp and turn it in the direction
of arrow
6
as far as the stop.
Attach the connector.
Insert the headlight and grille
Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 270 and tighten.
Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place.
227
Fuses and light bulbs
Removing/inserting the taillight
Fig. 271
Remove light / pull out connector
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Removing
Open the boot lid.
Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening
A
» Fig. 271.
Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow
1
.
Unscrew the screws
B
with the key from the tool kit.
Grasp the lamp and carefully remove in the direction of arrow
2
.
Press the latch
C
on the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Press the safety lug in the direction of arrow
4
and pull out the holder in the
direction of arrow
5
.
Fitting
Insert the connector into the light and lock it securely.
Tighten the lock in the opposite direction to the arrow
3
.
Insert the lamp with pins
D
» Fig. 271 into the recesses
E
in the body.
Carefully push the cover in » .
Screw the lamp into place and install the cover. The cover must engage se-
curely.
Close the boot lid.
CAUTION
When installing the light, ensure that the cable bundle does not become
pinched between the body and the lamp – risk of damage to the electrical in-
stallation and risk of water ingress.
If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we rec-
ommend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.
Replacing bulbs in the rear lamp - Option 1 (with LED parking light)
Fig. 272
Outer part of the lamp/holder with bulbs
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Unlock the bulb holder at the areas marked with arrows
» Fig. 272 and re-
move from the light.
Turn the respective light bulb counter-clockwise to the stop and remove it
from the bulb holder.
Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
Insert the bulb holder into the light » . The holder must engage securely.
228
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Before inserting the bulb holder into the light , check that the connector
A
» Fig. 272 is fitted correctly between the light and the bulb holder.
Make sure that when refitting the bulb holder into the light, the wiring har-
ness
B
is not pinched - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the electrical
installation.
Replacing the bulbs in the rear lamp - Option 2
Fig. 273
Outer part of the lamp / removing the bulb / lamp holder
Read and observe and on page 224 first.
Outer part of the lamp
Turn the holder with the bulb
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 273.
Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of
arrow
2
.
Change the bulb.
Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the light housing and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow
1
to the stop.
Inner parts of the lamp
Unlock the bulb holder at the areas marked with arrows » Fig. 273 and re-
move the bulb holder from the light.
Turn the respective light bulb counter-clockwise to the stop and remove it
from the bulb holder.
Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly. The holder must engage se-
curely.
229
Fuses and light bulbs
Technical data
Technical data
Basic vehicle data
Introduction
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The performance values listed were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in
conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the op-
erating and technical data of vehicles.
The listed values are for the basic model without optional equipment.
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation Meaning
AG Automatic gearbox
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
MG Manual gearbox
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbo charging and common rail
injection system
TSI
Petrol engine with turbo charging and direct injec-
tion
Vehicle data
Fig. 274
Type plate
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 274 is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the right-
hand driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle manufacturers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
In Infotainment, the VIN number can also be displayed in the menu

!
Service
.
Engine number
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents, field 17.
1
2
3
4
5
6
230
Technical data
Maximum permissible trailer weight
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maxi-
mum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi-
cle and the loaded trailer.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!
Operating weight
This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operat-
ing weight without any equipment added that would also increase the weight
(e.g. emergency or spare wheel etc.). This includes 75 kg driver's weight, the
weight of the operating fluids and the on-board tool kit and a fuel tank filled to
min. 90%.
Operating weight
Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg)
1.0 l/70 kW TSI
MG 1170
DSG 1204
1.0 l/81 kW TSI MG 1190
1.4 l/92 kW TSI
DSG 1227
DSG (Green tec) 1236
1.6 l/66 kW MPI MG 1160
1.6 l/81 kW MPI
MG 1175
AG 1215
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR
MG 1244
DSG 1265
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1295
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
The weight of the passengers.
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 182.
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
231
Technical data
Note
The emission and fuel consumption figures given on the ŠKODA websites or
in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established
in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by statutory or
technical rules for the determination of operational and technical data of mo-
tor vehicles.
Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ
from the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the
commercial and technical vehicle documentation.
232
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 275
Vehicle dimensions
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 275 Specification Value
A
Height 1461
B
Front track
Basic dimensions 1457
Vehicles with the 1.0 l/70 kW TSI, 1.6 l/66 kW MPI and 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR en-
gine
1463
C
Width 1706
D
Rear track
Basic dimensions 1494
Vehicles with the 1.0 l/70 kW TSI, 1.6 l/66 kW MPI and 1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR en-
gine
1500
E
Width including exterior mirror 1940
F
Clearance 136
G
Wheel base 2602
H
Length 4483
233
Technical data
Departure angle
Fig. 276
Overhang angle
Angle » Fig. 276
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
The overhang angle values indicate the maximum incline of a slope, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without the bumper or underbody mak-
ing contact with the slope. The values listed correspond to the maximum axle
load, front or back.
Overhang angle (°)
Overhang angle, front Overhang angle, rear
14 12.3
A
B
234
Technical data
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
Introduction
The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the operat-
ing and technical data of vehicles.
The exhaust gas standard is specified in the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of conformity (in the so-called COC document). The
declaration of conformity (the so-called COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 70/5000-5500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Gearbox MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 187 189
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.0 11.3
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 81/5000-5500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2000-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Gearbox MG
Top speed (km/h) 200
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.8
1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 92/5000-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1400-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1395
Gearbox DSG
Top speed (km/h) 208
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.0
235
Technical data
1.6 l/66 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 66/4250-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1598
Transmission MG
Top speed (km/h) 185
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.4
1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 81/5800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1598
Gearbox MG AG
Top speed (km/h) 195 191
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.3 11.6
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 66/3000-3250
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 230/1750-2500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/1422
Gearbox MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 185 185
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.7 11.8
1.6 l/85 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 85/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1596
Gearbox MG
Top speed (km/h) 201
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.0
236
Technical data
Index
A
A2DP/AVRCP 127
Abort route guidance 153
ABS 40, 168
Accessories 189
Activation of online services 14
Adjusting
Steering wheel 19
Advance warning / Emergency braking 45
Advice on tyre/wheel usage 204
AG 230
Air-conditioning system
Air outlet vents 89
airbag
warning light
41
Airbag 24
Adjustments and impairments to the airbag
system 190
Deactivation
26
Deployment 24
Airbag system 24
Air conditioning 86
Air distribution control 88
Climatronic
87
Manual air conditioning
87
Air distribution control 88
Air outlet vents 89
Alarm 56
Trailer 187
All-year tyres
207
Alphanumeric keyboard 94
Alternative routes 104
AM 111, 112
Amundsen
external module 92
Infotainment description 90
Android Auto 135
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 168
Anti-theft alarm system 56
Trailer 187
Anti-theft wheel bolts 211
APN 102
Apple CarPlay 136
applications
Disclaimer 90
Armrest
Front 70
Rear 71
Ashtray 79
Assembling the
bar ball, Step 1 183
bar ball, Step 2
184
Assist systems 167
Audio source 117
Auto Check Control
Vehicle status 47
Automatic consumer shutdown
202
Automatic drive
Selector lever 163
Automatic driving light control 62
Automatic gearbox
Disengage selector lever 164
Kickdown
165
Malfunction 42
Selector lever lock 164
Start and drive 165
Warning light 42
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment
94
Automatic transmission 163
Selector lever emergency unlocking 219
Tiptronic 164
AUX 74, 119
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 166
B
Ball bar
Standy position 183
Ball head
Check fitting 184
Ready position 182
Battery
Changing in key 217, 218
Belts 21
Belt tensioners 23
Blues
Infotainment description 91
Bluetooth
A2DP/AVRCP 101
Name 101
Paired external devices 101
Profiles
127
Set 104, 107
setting 101
Switching on/off 101, 107
Update 99, 102
Updates
107
Visibility 101, 107
Bluetooth Player 119
Bluetooth® update 126
Bonnet 198
Boot
Cargo element
85
Class N1 vehicles 85
Hooks 83
Boot cover
Parking position 84
Boot lid
57
Automatic locking 58
Open/Close 58
237
Index
Brake Assist (HBA) 169
Brake booster 160
Brake fluid 201
Check 201
specification 201
Brake pads
New 160
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Warning light 42
Brakes
Brake fluid 201
Braking and stabilisation systems 168
Handbrake 161
Information on braking 160
Run in 165
Warning lights 38
Brake system 168
Braking
Brake booster
160
Breakdown call 128
Breakdown kit 212
Broadcasting 111, 112
Buttons in driver's door
Electric power windows
59
C
Call list
Call list 130
CAR 156
Car battery
Automatic consumer shutdown
202
Disconnecting and reconnecting 203
Replacing 203
CAR button 156
Car care
Exterior
192
Interior 193
Car computer
see multifunction display 48
Care and maintenance 189
Care Connect 15
Cargo element 85
Car park 143
Carrier 85
CarStick 132
Car washing 191
Exterior 192
Interior 193
washing 191
cellphone
Disclaimer 90
Central locking 52
Problems 56
Central locking button 54
Changing
Battery
217, 218
Wheels 209
Windscreen wiper blades 220
Changing a wheel 209
Changing gear
Selector lever
163
Charging a vehicle battery 203
Check
Brake fluid 201
Engine oil 199
Fit ball head properly 184
Oil level
199
Checking
Battery condition 203
Coolant 200
Children and safety 28
Child safety lock
56
Child seat 28
Classification 30
Installation location 30, 31
in the passenger seat 30
ISOFIX 31
on the front passenger seat 29
TOP TETHER 32
Cigarette lighter 80
Clearing calls 104
Climatronic 86
air distribution control 88
Automatic operation 88
Operating elements 87
Clock 109
Change display 95
Clothes hook 77
Cockpit 35
Lighting 64
Comfort flashing 61
COMING HOME 63
compartments 73
Compatible sources
Images
123
Component protection 190
Computer
see multifunction display 48
Conditions for pairing
127
Conference call 130
Configuration wizard 96
Connect external device to the Infotainment
hotspot 133
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device
133
Coolant 200
Checking 200
Refilling 200
Temperature display 37
Warning light
43
CORNER
See Fog lights with CORNER function 63
238
Index
Correct routing of seat belt
21
Correct seating position 18, 20
Cruise Control System 174
Cup holders 74
Custom POI categories 146, 147
D
DAB 111, 112
Additional information 111
Radio text and images presentation 111
Set 103, 108
DAB slideshow 111
Data connection
Amundsen 132
CarStick 132
Internet 132
Data roaming 102
Date 100, 107
DAY LIGHT
see Daytime running lights
61
Daytime running lights 61
De-icing the windscreen and rear window 65
Deactivation
Airbag
26
Delayed locking of the boot lid
See boot lid 58
Delete destination 150
Demo mode 106, 151
Departure angle 234
Destination
Custom destination
146
Enter destination using the address 142
enter in map 143
Favourite 144, 150
Flagged destination
144
Home address 145
Image with GPS 148
Last destinations 144
Map point 143
Memory 150
Online destinations 144
search 141
Stored destination 144
Telephone contact 144
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 141
vCard 144
Destination details 150
Destination management
Destination details 150
Favourite 150
Storage 150
Destination memory 144
Device menu
Sound 100
Diesel
196
Diesel fuel 196
Diesel particle filter (DPF) 44
Digital clock 46
Digital service schedule 51
Dipped beam
60
Dipstick 199
Directive 2014/53/EU 8
Disclaimer
applications 90
external devices 90
Mobile phones
90
Display
Coolant temperature 37
Fuel level 37
Gear changes 47
in the instrument cluster
46
MAXI DOT 50
Display of a low temperature 45
Display POIs in the map 143
Distance warning 178
Diverting calls 104
Door
Child safety lock 56
Emergency locking 218
Emergency locking of the driver's door 218
Opening/ Closing 55
Door alarm 46
Drive Green 165
Driver information system 46
Driving
Driving through water 166
Emissions 231
Fuel consumption 231
Maximum speed 235
DSG 230
Dynamic route 156
E
Economical driving 165
Edit route 153
EDS 169
Electric power windows 58
Buttons in driver's door 59
Operational faults
60
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 169
Electronic immobiliser 157
Elevation 139
emergency
Jump-starting 215
Emergency
Changing a wheel
209
Hazard warning light system 64
Jump-starting 215
Selector lever unlocking 219
Starting/stopping the engine at the push of a
button
158, 159
Towing the using the tow hitch 217
239
Index
Towing the vehicle 216
Tyre repair 212
Unlocking/locking the door 218
Emergency call 15, 128
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher 208
First aid kit 208
Jack 209
Reflective vest 208
Vehicle tool kit 209
Warning triangle 208
Emergency spare
Removing / stowing 210
Emergency spare wheel 206
Emission control system 40
Emissions 231
Engine
Information messages 43
Run in
165
Engine compartment 197
Brake fluid 201
Coolant 200
Engine oil 199
Overview
198
Vehicle battery 202
Windscreen washer fluid 199
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 168
Engine number 230
Engine oil 199
Check
199
Oil changing 199
Refilling 199
Specification 199
Warning light 43, 44
Enter destination
142, 143
EPC 40
Equalizer 100
ESC
Operation 168
External device data transfer 96, 101, 107
External devices
Disclaimer 90
External module 92
SD card 118
Extras
manual search 112
Scan 112
F
Factory settings 101, 107, 156
Familiarizing yourself with the vehicle
2
Fastening elements
82
Fatigue detection
Fatigue detection system 180
Fatigue detection system 180
Favourite 144, 150
Favourite contacts
129
file formats
media 120
Requirements and Restrictions 120
File formats
Images
123
File Formats 121
Films 192
Find
Car park 143
Petrol station 143
Restaurant
143
Finish route guidance 153
Fire extinguisher 208
First aid kit 208
Flagged destination 144
Flashing
61
Floor covering in the luggage compartment 83
Floor mats 162
See Floor mats 162
FM 111, 112
Set 103, 108
Fog lights 63
Warning light 42
Fog lights/rear fog light 63
Fog lights with CORNER function 63
Force limiter
Window 59
Front assist
Warning light 45
Front Assist 177
Deactivation/activation 179
Distance warning 178
Malfunctions 179
Operation 178
Radar sensor 167
Settings in Infotainment
177
Warning and automatic braking 178
Warning light 45
Front seats 69
Fuel 195
Diesel
196
Fuel gauge 37
refer to Fuel 195
Refuelling 195
Unleaded petrol 195
Warning light 41
Fuel consumption
231
Fuel options 105
Fuel reserve 41
Functional surfaces 92
Fuses 221
in the dashboard
221, 222
in the engine compartment 223, 224
240
Index
G
Gearbox
Information messages 42
Gear change
Gear recommendation 47
Information on the selected gear 47
Gear changing
lever 162
Genuine parts 189
Glasses storage box 76
GPS 139
Graphical driving recommendations 152
H
handbrake
warning light 38
Handbrake 161
Hazard warning light system 64
HBA 169
Headlight
Headlight assist
62
Headlight assist 45, 62
Headrests 71
Adjusting the height 71
Heating
86, 87
Air distribution control
88
Exterior mirrors 68
Seats 72
Windscreen and rear window 65
Hill Start Assist 169
Hitch
182
Home address 105, 145
Hooks 83
Horn 35
Hotspot
Connect
133
Set 133
I
I-PAD holder 80
Ignition lock 158
Images
Compatible sources 123
Display 103
File formats 123
Main menu 122
Operation 122
Requirements and restrictions 123
Safe removal of the data source 101
Selecting the image source 122
Set 103
Supported file formats 123
Image viewer 122
Immobiliser 157
Import
Destinations (online) 147
Destinations (vCard)
146
POI categories 146
POI categories (online) 139, 147
Routes (online) 154
Import contacts 109
Importing contacts
104
Inertia reels 23
Information about the towing process 216
Information call 128
Information system 46
Gear recommendation 47
MAXI DOT display
50
Multifunction display 48
Service interval display 51
Infotainment 90
Infotainment description
Amundsen
90
Swing 91
Infotainment Description
Blues 91
Infotainment language 100, 107
Infotainment menus
Grid display 95
Horizontal display 95
Infotainment Online 16
Infotainment operation 92
Infotainment screen 92
Infotainment operation using an application in
the external device 96
Infotainment overview 90
Infotainment restart 94
Infotainment screen 100, 106
Areas 92
Important information 92
Keyboard 94
Maintenance 92
Operation 92
Input screen
Language characters
107
Input screen with keyboard 94
Instrument cluster 36
See instrument cluster 36
Vehicle status 47
Warning lights
37
Interior light 65
Interior lights 64, 65
Interior monitor 57
Internet 132
Amundsen 132
CarStick
132
ISOFIX 31
J
Jack
209
Jacking points
Raise vehicle
212
Journey data 49
Jump-starting 215
241
Index
K
KESSY
deactivating 54
Starting/Stopping the engine 158
Switching the ignition on/off 158
Unlocking/locking 53
Key
Changing battery 217, 218
Lock 53
Starting/Stopping the engine 158
Switching the ignition on/off 158
Unlock 53
Keyboard 94
L
Lamp failure 44
Lamps
Warning light 44
Lane recommendation 152
Language characters
101
Last destinations 144
Latitude 139
LEAVING HOME 63
Lever
Cruise control
175
Front Assist
179
Operation of the information system 47
Speed limiter 177
Turn signal/main beam 61
Windscreen wipers 67
Liability for defects
6
Light 60
Cockpit 64
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 63
Daytime running lights 61
Flash
61
Fog lights/rear fog light 63
Fog lights with CORNER function 63
Headlight assist 62
Parking light 64
Replacing bulbs 224
Turn signal/main beam 61
Light Assist
see Headlight assist 62
Light bulbs
Replacing 224
Lighting
Interior lighting 64
Luggage compartment 81
Lights
Automatic driving light control 62
Dipped beam 60
Driving abroad 64
Hazard warning light system 64
Headlight cleaning system 67
Headlight range control 60
Parking lights
60
Switching on and off 60
Warning lights 37
List
of available stations 113
of telephone contacts
128
With folder/track list 117
List of available hotspots 133
List of paired external devices 127
List of traffic reports 154
Load 231
Localisation services
15
Lock
Individual settings 55
KESSY 53
Key 53
Locking
Central locking button
54
in case of emergency 218
Remote control 53
Lock steering lock 157
Longitude 139
Luggage compartment 81
Cover 83
Fastening elements 82
Fixing nets 82
Floor covering on both sides 83
Lighting 81
See boot lid 58
unlocking manually 219
Unlocking the boot lid 219
Luggage compartment cover 83
Luggage Storage
Storage compartments 84
M
Main beam 61
Warning light 42
Main menu
Android Auto 136
Apple CarPlay
136
Images 122
Media 115
Media Command 124
MirrorLink® 137
Navigation
140
Radio 111
SmartLink+ 135
SMS 131
WLAN 133
Make up mirror 66
Manage memory
105
Management of online services 14
Management of online services ŠKODA Con-
nect 107
Management of ŠKODA Connect Online Serv-
ices
102
Manage stored routes 154
Managing paired devices 127
242
Index
Manoeuvre
Graphical driving recommendations 152
Navigation announcements 152
Manual air conditioning
Air distribution control 88
Controls 87
Manual gear changing
See Gear changing 162
Map
Automatic scale 148
Display 140
Display of traffic signs 104
Display options 148
Display POIs 143
Fast map view 148
Lane guidance 104
Main menu 140
Manual scale 148
Map centring
149
Operation 140
Orientation 149
POI display 104
Road signs 150
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display
50
MAXI DOT display
assist systems menu item 51
Audio menu item 50
Main menu 50
Navigation menu item
50
Operation 47, 48
MAXI DOT Display
Apple CarPlay 51
Telephone menu 51
Maximum speed
235
MCB 169
Mechanical window lifter 58
opening/closing 58
media
Compatible sources 120
file formats 120
Requirements and Restrictions 120
Media
Audio source 117
AUX 74, 119
Bluetooth Audio 119
Browser 117
File Formats 121
List 117
Main menu 115
Multimedia database 117
Operation 115
Playback control 116
Safe removal of the data source 101
Safe removal of the external data source 107
SD card 118
Select audio source
115
Set 108, 110
Setting 103
Supported Media 121
USB 74, 118
Voice control
97
WLAN 119
Media Command
Control 124
Main menu 124
Supported formats 124
Memory
49
MG 230
Mirror 66, 68
MirrorLink® 136
Modes of the automatic transmission 163
Modifications and technical alterations
189
More keypad languages 101, 107
Most frequent routes 152
MPI 230
MSR 168
Multicollision brake (MCB) 169
Multifunction display
Functions 48
Information Overview 48
Memory 49
Multifunction pocket 83
Multifunction steering wheel 48
Multimedia
see Media 115
Multimedia database 117
Multimedia holder 76
Mute 95
MyŠKODA App application 10
N
N1 85
Navigation
Abort route guidance 153
Advanced settings 106
Alternative routes
104
Contacts 144
Demo mode 106, 151
Destination address 142
Destination details 150
Destination display
148
Destination in map 143
Destination memory 144
Destination search 141
Dynamic route 104
Edit route 153
Favourites
144
Finish route guidance 153
Foreword 139
Fuel options 105
GPS 139
Graphical driving recommendations
152
Home address 145
Image with GPS 148
Import destinations 146
243
Index
Imported destinations 105
Last destinations 144
Main menu 140
Manage memory 105
Map 104
Map centring 149
Map display options 148
Map orientation 149
Map scale 148
Most frequent routes 152
Navigation announcements 105, 152
Navigation data 139
Preferred type of route 104
Route 150
Route calculation 151
Route details 153
Route display 148
Route guidance 150
Route information
153
Route list 154
Route options 104
Set 104
Speed limits 105
Split screen
141
Start route guidance 151
Status line 106
Stopover 150
Traffic obstruction 156
Trailer towing 151
Types of destination search/destination en-
try
141
Update navigation data 139
Update the navigation data 105
Updating the navigation data online 139
Version information
105
Voice control 97
Working with the navigation 139
Navigation announcements 105, 152
Navigation data 139
Nets
82
Network
Data connection 102
Data roaming 102
Set 104
setting 102
Values of the downloaded data 102
New route 154
Notes 11
O
oil
see Engine oil 199
Oil changing
Engine oil
199
On-board computer
see multifunction display
48
Online
Destination details 150
Destination import 144
Destination search
141
Details of the traffic report 155
Find car park 143
Find petrol station 143
Import destination 147
Importing POI categories
139, 147
List of traffic reports 154
Route import 154
Update navigation data 139
Updating the navigation data 139
Online destinations 144
Online services
Deleting the user
14
Electronic Owner's Manual 13
Instruction video 13
Localisation services 15
Private mode
14
Services Management 14
Switching user 14
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 12
Online Services 12
Activation in Infotainment 14
Care Connect 15
Infotainment Online 16
proactive service 15
Remote access to the vehicle 16
Service package 12
ŠKODA Connect website 12
Online services ŠKODA Connect
enable service 107
Operating the Infotainment menus 94
Operating weight 231
Operation
Images 122
Media 115
Radio 111
Telephone 125, 126
Voice control 98
Original accessories
189
Overview
Cockpit 35
Engine compartment 198
Fuses 221
Warning lights
37
P
Pairing process 127
Parking 161
Parking aid 170
Parking aid 170
Automatic system activation when moving for-
ward
172
Operation 171
Settings in Infotainment 170
Parking assistance
Activation / deactivation
172
Parking lights 60
Parking sensors
Display Infotainment screen 171
244
Index
Parking the vehicle
see Parking 161
ParkPilot 170
Parts replacement 189
Passive safety
Before setting off 18
Driving safety 18
Passive Safety 18
Pedals 162
Floor mats 162
Petrol 195
Petrol station 143
Petrol station logo 104
PIN
Set 104
Playback
Media 116
Pocketin the luggage compartment 83
Pockets
78
POI 146, 147
POIs 143
Power steering 39
Practical features
Glasses storage box
76
Pockets 78
Storage compartment for umbrella 77
Waste container 75
Preheating unit 40
Preset list 113
Principles of Infotainment operation
92
Private mode 14
Proactive service 15
R
Radio
Broadcasting 112
List of available stations 113
Main menu 111
manual search 112
Operating 111
Preset buttons 113
Preset list 113
Radio station logo 114
Save station 113
Scan 112
Search for stations 112
Select station 113
Set 103, 108, 110
Traffic program (TP) 114
Voice control 97
Radio equipment
Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 8
Radio station
Save 113
Radio station logos 114
Update
102
Radio stations
Select stations and search 112
Raise vehicle 212
Rear fog light 63
Warning light
40
Rear headrests
Removing/inserting 71
Rear seats 70
Rear view mirror 68
Rear window - heating 65
Refilling
Coolant
200
Engine oil 199
Windscreen washer fluid 199
Reflective vest 208
Refuelling
195
Fuel 195
Register online services
settings 107
Settings 102
Registration of online services
Electronic Owner's Manual 13
Instruction video 13
Regulation
Headlight beam 60
Remote access to the vehicle 16
Remote control
Changing battery 217, 218
Synchronisation process 56
Unlocking/locking the vehicle 53
Removing the
bar ball, Step 1 184
bar ball, Step 2 185
Repairs and technical alterations 189
Replacing
Bulbs 224
Fuses 221
Windscreen wiper blades 219
Reset counter for distance driven (trip)
46
Restaurant 143
Rev counter 36
Rims 204
Road signs
Infotainment display
150
Roof
Load 85
Roof rack 85
Route 150
New route 154
Online route import
154
Route list 154
Store route 153
Route calculation 151
Trailer towing 151
Route details
153
Route information 153
Route list 154
Route options 104
245
Index
Run-in
Engine 165
Running in
Brake pads 160
Tyres 204
S
SafeLock 54
Safe removal of the data source 101
Safe removal of the external data source 107
Safety 18
Airbag 24
Child safety 28
Child safety seats
28
Correct seating position
18
Headrests 71
ISOFIX 31
TOP TETHER 32
SAFE, SAFELOCK
See SafeLock
54
Save station 113
Saving electrical energy 165
Saving fuel 165
Scan 112
Scraper
193
Screen
see Infotainment screen 92
Screen display 92
SD card 118
Safe removal 107
Search
Destination
141
Online destinations 141
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 141
Search for stations
112
Seat belt
height adjustment 21
Warning light 43
Seat belts 21
Belt tensioners 23
fastening and unfastening 22
Inertia reels 23
Warning light 39
Seats
Adjusting the front seats 69
Front 69
Front armrest 70
Headrests 71
Heating 72
Rear 70
Rear armrest 71
Rear seat backrests 70
Setting 69
Select audio source
115
Selector lever 163
Selector lever control 163
Selector lever lock 42
Select station 112, 113
Service
189
Service interval display 51
Warning light 45
Service interval 51
Service interval display 51
Service intervals 51
Service schedule
51
Setting
Headrests 71
Mirror 68
Seat belt height 21
Seats
69
Time 46
settings
ŠKODA Connect 107
Settings
Advanced settings 106
APN 102
Bluetooth 101, 104, 107
Codecs 103
Configuration wizard 96
DAB 103, 108
Data connection 102
Equalizer 100
External device data transfer 101, 107
FM 103, 108
Fuel options 105
Images 103
Information regarding the navigation data ver-
sion 105
Infotainment 100, 106, 109
Infotainment language 100, 107
Infotainment screen 100, 106
Manage favourites
129
Manage memory 105
Map 104
Media 103, 108, 110
More keypad languages 101, 107
Navigation
104
Navigation announcements 105
Network 102
PIN 104
Radio 103, 108, 110
Reset to factory settings 101, 107, 156
Route options
104
SmartLink+ 104, 109
Software update 99
Software updates 107
Sound 100, 106, 109
Sound system
100
Speed limits 105
Subwoofer 100
Surround 100
System information 99, 102, 107
246
Index
ŠKODA Connect 102
Telephone 104, 109
Text messages 104
Time and date 100, 107
Units 101, 107
Update software 102
User profile 129
Vehicle 156
Voice control 101
Volume 95
WLAN 101
Setup 109
Shifting
Tiptronic 164
SmartLink+ 134
Android Auto 135
Apple CarPlay 136
Introduction to the subject 134
Main menu
135
MirrorLink® 136
Set 104, 109
ŠKODA OneApp application 137
SMS
Main menu
131
New message 131
Received message 132
Snow chains 207
sockets
12-volt socket in the luggage compartment 79
Sockets
12-volt socket in the interior
79
Software update 99
Software Update 102
Software updates 107
SOS button
15
Sound 100, 106, 109
Sound system 100
Spare wheel 206
Removing / stowing 210
Speed limiter 42, 176
Speed limits 105, 152
Speed regulating system
Warning light 42
Speed symbol 206
Split screen 141
Manoeuvre 152
Spoiler 190
SSID 101
Stabilisation system 168
Stability Control (ESC) 39, 168
Standby 95
START-STOP
159
Deactivate/activate the system manually
160
functionality 159
Jump-starting 215
Warning light 45
START-STOP system 159
Start engine
158
Jump-starting 215
Starter button
Lock/unlock the steering lock 157
Problems with starting the engine 159
Starting/Stopping the engine
158
Switching the ignition on/off 158
Starting engine
Jump-starting 215
Starting the engine
Immobiliser 157
Start route guidance
151
Status bar 92, 140
Status line
Navigation 106
Telephone 125, 126
Steering lock (KESSY system)
39
Steering wheel
Adjusting 19
Buttons 48
Proper posture 19
Stop engine 158
Stopover 150
Stopping
see Parking 161
Storage 73
Storage compartments
see Practical features 73
Stored destinations
Destination memory 144
Last destinations 144
Store destination 150
Subwoofer 100
Sun visors 66
Supported audio sources 121
Supported files
121
Supported sources
media 120
Surround 100
Swing
Infotainment description
91
Switch
Car battery 203
Switching off Infotainment 94
Switching off the ignition 158
Switching on Infotainment 94
Switching on the ignition
158
Switching the lights on and off 60
Switch off
Alarm 57
System information 99, 102, 107
T
Tablet holder 80
247
Index
TCS 39, 40, 168
TDI CR 230
Technical data 230
Telephone
Additional telephone 127
Bluetooth profiles 127
Bluetooth® update 126
Breakdown call 128
Call list 130
Call settings 104
Clearing calls 104
Compatibility 126
Conditions for pairing 127
Conference call 130
Connecting to the infotainment 126
Connection types 127
Dialling the telephone number 128
Diverting calls 104
Emergency call
128
Enter telephone number 128
Favourite contacts 129
Functions 128
Import contacts 109
Importing contacts
104
Information service 128
Introductory information 125
Main menu 125, 126
Main telephone 127
Manage favourites 109
Managing favourites
104
Operation 125, 126
pairing 126
Pairing process 127
Premium 104
Set
104, 109
Setting text messages 104
Telephone 125, 126
Telephone book 128
Telephone call 130
Text messages (SMS) 131
User profile 104, 109
Voice control 97
Voicemail 128
Telephone book 128
Telephone call 130
Telephone compatibility 126
Telephone connection types 127
Telephone functions 128
Telephone number 128
Text messages 131
Ticket holder 73
Time 46, 100, 107
see Clock 109
Time and date display in the Infotainment
screen 95
Tiptronic 164
TMC
Details of the traffic report
155
Dynamic route 156
List of traffic reports 154
Tools 209
TOP TETHER 32
Touch screen
92
Towing 217
Towing a trailer 187
Towing away 216
Towing device 186
Accessories 185
Description
182
Vertical load 182
Towing eye 217
Towing protection 57
Towing the vehicle 216
Traction control (TCS)
39, 168
Traffic
Details of the traffic report 155
Dynamic route 156
List of traffic reports 154
Traffic Information (TMC) 155
Traffic obstruction 156
Traffic program (TP) 114
Traffic reports (TMC) 154
Trailer
Connect and disconnect 186
Loading 186
Towing a trailer 187
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA) 169
Trailer towing 182
Navigation 151
Transmitter
See main menu 111
Transport
Luggage compartment
81
Roof rack 85
Towing device and trailer 182
Transporting children 28
Triangle 208
TSA
169
TSI 230
Turn signal 61
Turn signal system
Warning light 42
Tutorial videos 10
Type plate
230
Tyre
Wear indicator 206
Tyre load capacity 206
Tyre pressure 205
Warning light
41
Tyre pressure monitor
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 180
248
Index
Tyre pressure monitoring 180
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotain-
ment display 181
Warning light 41
Tyre repair 212
Tyres 204
damage 204
Explanation of the label 206
new 204
Tyre pressure 205
Tyre size 206
U
Units 101, 107
Unlock
Individual settings
55
KESSY 53
Key 53
Unlocking
Central locking button
54
In case of emergency 218
Remote control 53
Unlocking and locking 52
Unlock steering lock 157
Update navigation data
139
Update the navigation data 105
Updating the navigation data 139
USB 74, 118
Safe removal 107
Useful equipment
Clothes hook
77
Cup holders 74
Multimedia holder 76
Useful features
12-volt socket in the interior 79
12-volt socket in the luggage compartment
79
Ashtray 79
Cigarette lighter 80
Pockets 78
Reflective vest 208
Storage compartment 73
Ticket holder 73
Useful links 2
User account
Configuration wizard 96
User profile 104, 109
V
vCard 144, 146
Vehicle battery
charging 203
Checking the condition
203
Safety instructions
202
Warning light 43
Winter operation 203
Vehicle care 190
Exterior 193
Vehicle cleaning
190
Exterior 193
Windscreens 193
Vehicle dimensions 233
Vehicle height 233
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
230
Vehicle length 233
Vehicle settings 156
Vehicle status
Auto Check Control 47
Vehicle systems 156
Vehicle tool kit
209
Vehicle width 233
Vest 208
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number 230
Visibility
65
Visors 66
Voice control 97
Commands 98
Correction of a voice command input 98
Help 98
Not recognising a voice command 98
Operation principle 98
Settings 101
Stopping/restoring entry 98
switching on/off 97
Voicemail 128
Volume 95
Volume setting 95
W
Warning at when speeding 49
Warning lights 37
Warning symbols
see Warning lights 37
Warning triangle 208
Warranty
6
Waste container 75
Water
driving through 166
Weather conditions 189
Weights
230, 231
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts 211
Caps 211
Loosening and tightening 211
Wheels 204
Changing
209
Directional tyres 204
Full trim 210
Load Index 206
Snow chains 207
Speed symbol
206
Tyre age 204
Tyre damage 204
249
Index
Tyre pressure 205
Tyre storage 204
Winter tyres 207
Window operation 58
Windows
operating 58
Windscreen - heating 65
Windscreen washer fluid
Refilling 199
Warning light 45
Windscreen washing systems 66
Windscreen wipers and washers 66
Activation 67
Add fluid 199
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 220
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 219
Service position of the windscreen wiper
arms 219
Winter operation
207
All-year tyres 207
Diesel fuel 196
Snow chains 207
Vehicle battery 203
Winter tyres
207
Winter tyres 207
Wipers and washer
Warning light for windscreen washer fluid lev-
el 45
Wiping interval 67
Wireless Internet Hotspot
setting
101
WLAN 119, 133
Client 133
Connect 133
Connect to hotspot
133
Set hotspot 133
Switch hotspot on/off 133
WPS 101, 134
WLAN client
setting 101
WLAN Client 133
WPS 101, 134
Other Characters
ŠKODA Connect
register 107
Register 102
see Online Services 12
services Manager 107
Services Manager 102
Set 102
set to
107
ŠKODA Connect Online Services
Enable services
102
Register 102
ŠKODA OneApp application 137
250
Index
251
Index
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2017
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Rapid anglicky 11.2017
5JA012720AM

5JA012720AM
6


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Skoda Rapid - 2017 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Skoda Rapid - 2017 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 39,83 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Skoda Rapid - 2017

Skoda Rapid - 2017 User Manual - German - 268 pages

Skoda Rapid - 2017 User Manual - Dutch - 264 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info